Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Probability

1,628 missions · 681 completed

Missions

Open947Completed681All1628
Operations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Understanding the Efficiency of Multi-Server Service Systems I: With Poisson Arrivals and Finitely Many Service-Time Values of Mean 1, the Number of Busy Servers in M/G/∞ Is Poisson(λ)Research Paper

Motivation

Call centers, hospital wards, telephone exchanges and server farms all face the same staffing question: given an arrival rate λ\lambdaλ, how many servers sss are needed to keep congestion at a fixed level? A widely used answer is the square-root staffing rule

s=λ+γλ,s = \lambda + \gamma\sqrt{\lambda},s=λ+γλ​,

where the grade of service γ>0\gamma > 0γ>0 sets the congestion level. It says that the safety capacity above the offered load grows like the square root of the load, which is the quantitative form of the economy of scale of large service systems.

Whitt (Management Science 38(5), 1992, pp. 708–723) explains the rule through an associated infinite-server (IS) model, in which every customer starts service immediately on arrival. If the number of busy servers NNN in the IS model is Poisson with mean λ\lambdaλ, its mean and variance are both λ\lambdaλ, so the event "more than sss servers busy" has roughly constant probability when s−λs - \lambdas−λ is a fixed multiple of λ\sqrt\lambdaλ​. The Poisson law of NNN is therefore the probabilistic fact on which the heuristic rests. This mission formalizes that fact as proved in §2.4–§2.5 of the paper: first for deterministic unit service times (M/D/∞), then for service times taking finitely many values with mean 111 (M/G/∞ with finite support).

Timeline:

  • The stationary number in system of M/G/∞ is classically known to be Poisson with mean λ⋅E[S]\lambda \cdot E[S]λ⋅E[S] for general service-time laws (Palm's theorem; see Gross et al., Fundamentals of Queueing Theory).
  • Halfin and Whitt (Operations Research 29, 1981) proved the heavy-traffic limit theorem that justifies square-root staffing for GI/M/s queues.
  • Whitt (1992) gave the elementary IS derivation formalized here, with the finite-support M/G/∞ case argued through splitting a Poisson stream into independent class streams.

Setting

Time is measured in units of the mean service time. Let T0,T1,T2,…T_0, T_1, T_2, \dotsT0​,T1​,T2​,… be i.i.d. exponential random variables with rate λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0, the interarrival times, and let τn=T0+⋯+Tn−1\tau_n = T_0 + \cdots + T_{n-1}τn​=T0​+⋯+Tn−1​ be the nnn-th arrival epoch. The arrival counting process A(t)A(t)A(t) is the number of n≥1n \ge 1n≥1 with τn≤t\tau_n \le tτn​≤t, the number of arrivals in (0,t](0, t](0,t]. This is a Poisson process of rate λ\lambdaλ.

Customers are numbered k=0,1,2,…k = 0, 1, 2, \dotsk=0,1,2,…; customer kkk arrives at τk+1\tau_{k+1}τk+1​, is served at once, and has service time DkD_kDk​. Following the paper (proof of Proposition 2.3, p. 712), an arrival at time ttt is counted and a departure at time ttt is not, so customer kkk is present at ttt iff τk+1≤t<τk+1+Dk\tau_{k+1} \le t < \tau_{k+1} + D_kτk+1​≤t<τk+1​+Dk​. The number of busy servers is

N(t)=#{k:τk+1≤t<τk+1+Dk}.N(t) = \#\{k : \tau_{k+1} \le t < \tau_{k+1} + D_k\}.N(t)=#{k:τk+1​≤t<τk+1​+Dk​}.

For the M/G/∞ case fix m≥1m \ge 1m≥1 classes with probabilities p1,…,pmp_1, \dots, p_mp1​,…,pm​ and values d1,…,dm≥0d_1, \dots, d_m \ge 0d1​,…,dm​≥0. Each customer carries a class label JkJ_kJk​, the labels are i.i.d. with P(Jk=i)=piP(J_k = i) = p_iP(Jk​=i)=pi​ and independent of the interarrival times, and Dk=dJkD_k = d_{J_k}Dk​=dJk​​. The class-iii busy count is Ni(t)=#{k:Jk=i, τk+1≤t<τk+1+di}N_i(t) = \#\{k : J_k = i,\ \tau_{k+1} \le t < \tau_{k+1} + d_i\}Ni​(t)=#{k:Jk​=i, τk+1​≤t<τk+1​+di​}.

Formalization targets

Goal: the M/G/∞ claim (§2.5, p. 713)

If ∑i=1mpidi=1\sum_{i=1}^m p_i d_i = 1∑i=1m​pi​di​=1 and t>max⁡idit > \max_i d_it>maxi​di​, then

P(N(t)=k)=e−λλkk!,k=0,1,2,…P\big(N(t) = k\big) = e^{-\lambda}\frac{\lambda^k}{k!}, \qquad k = 0, 1, 2, \dotsP(N(t)=k)=e−λk!λk​,k=0,1,2,…

The law depends on the service-time distribution only through its mean.

Milestones

  1. Proposition 2.3 (p. 712): with unit service times, N(t)=A(t)−A(t−1)N(t) = A(t) - A(t-1)N(t)=A(t)−A(t−1), pathwise.
  2. Proof of Proposition 2.4 (p. 712): for t≥1t \ge 1t≥1, A(t)−A(t−1)A(t) - A(t-1)A(t)−A(t−1) has the same law as A(1)A(1)A(1).
  3. Proposition 2.4 (p. 712): in M/D/∞ with unit service times, N(t)∼Poisson(λ)N(t) \sim \mathrm{Poisson}(\lambda)N(t)∼Poisson(λ) for each t>1t > 1t>1.
  4. §2.5, splitting (p. 713): the class-iii arrivals form independent Poisson streams of rates λpi\lambda p_iλpi​; stated as independence and Poisson laws of the class counts in one window (ai,bi](a_i, b_i](ai​,bi​] per class.
  5. §2.5, "Hence" (p. 713): for t>max⁡idit > \max_i d_it>maxi​di​, the Ni(t)N_i(t)Ni​(t) are independent, Ni(t)∼Poisson(λpidi)N_i(t) \sim \mathrm{Poisson}(\lambda p_i d_i)Ni​(t)∼Poisson(λpi​di​), and N(t)=∑iNi(t)N(t) = \sum_i N_i(t)N(t)=∑i​Ni​(t) almost surely.

A companion item, Proposition 2.1 (p. 710), states that (2) implies λ=s+γ2/2−γs+γ2/4\lambda = s + \gamma^2/2 - \gamma\sqrt{s + \gamma^2/4}λ=s+γ2/2−γs+γ2/4​ and s−γs≤λ≤s−γs+γ2/2s - \gamma\sqrt s \le \lambda \le s - \gamma\sqrt s + \gamma^2/2s−γs​≤λ≤s−γs​+γ2/2, connecting (2) to the utilization equation λ=s−γs\lambda = s - \gamma\sqrt sλ=s−γs​.

Significance

The goal is the step that turns the IS heuristic from a special case into a statement about general service: since N(t)N(t)N(t) is Poisson with mean λ\lambdaλ whatever the finite service-time law of mean 111, the square-root rule derived from M/D/∞ applies unchanged to M/G/∞, and the paper uses this to argue that sss-server congestion is nearly insensitive to the service distribution beyond its mean when sss is large.

The results are classical and proved; none has a machine-checked proof on Prove2Me. Formalizing them adds:

  • a Poisson process built from exponential interarrival times, with the stationary-increment property derived rather than assumed;
  • Poisson splitting (thinning by i.i.d. labels) with independence of the class streams, a tool reused throughout queueing and inventory theory;
  • the M/G/∞ Poisson law for discrete service times, complementing the open platform items ServiceParts.Palm.units_in_resupply_poisson_finite_time and ServiceParts.Palm.palm_theorem, which treat service times with a density.

The open item QueueingFundamentals.Foundations.poisson_count_cdf (the marginal law A(t)∼Poisson(λt)A(t) \sim \mathrm{Poisson}(\lambda t)A(t)∼Poisson(λt)) is related but distinct from milestone 2, which concerns the increment over (t−1,t](t-1, t](t−1,t].

Difficulty

The paper's arguments are short, but each hides a probabilistic fact that is not elementary from the definitions. The increment law of milestone 2 requires the memoryless property at the deterministic time t−1t - 1t−1: the residual time to the next arrival after t−1t-1t−1 must be shown exponential and independent of the past, which is a statement about a random index (the number of arrivals by t−1t-1t−1), not about a fixed interarrival time. Splitting (milestone 4) requires a joint computation over all classes at once: the class counts are built from the same arrival epochs, so their independence is a genuine property of Poisson processes, false for general renewal arrivals, and cannot be obtained one class at a time. The overlapping windows (t−di,t](t - d_i, t](t−di​,t] of different classes make this unavoidable.

Formalization scope

  • The arrival process is the published definition QueueingFundamentals.Foundations.ArrivalProcess: IsExpInterarrivals μ lam T (measurable, mutually independent, exponential with rate lam), arrivalTime, countingProcess. The Poisson process is not postulated through an increment-law axiom; a definition with such a field would make milestones 2 and 3 a projection and is ruled out.
  • The model IsMarkedPoisson adds measurable, i.i.d. class labels J : ℕ → Ω → Fin m with P(J k = i) = p i, independent of the interarrival sequence. Service time of customer k is d (J k). Labels, not values, distinguish classes, so equal d i are not merged.
  • Counts are Set.ncard, which is 000 on an infinite set. Milestone 1 carries the hypothesis that only finitely many arrivals occur by ttt, and the decomposition N(t)=∑iNi(t)N(t) = \sum_i N_i(t)N(t)=∑i​Ni​(t) is stated almost surely. Poisson laws are stated pointwise, P(X=k)=e−cck/k!P(X = k) = e^{-c}c^k/k!P(X=k)=e−cck/k!, avoiding pushforwards of possibly non-measurable maps.
  • Standing conventions: service rate 111; the system starts empty at time 000; arrival counted at ttt, departure not; "steady state" means the law at each fixed t>max⁡idit > \max_i d_it>maxi​di​, with no limit t→∞t \to \inftyt→∞; the paper's 1≤i≤n1 \le i \le n1≤i≤n is Fin m. The constraint ∑ipidi=1\sum_i p_i d_i = 1∑i​pi​di​=1 forces m≥1m \ge 1m≥1, and the label law forces pi≥0p_i \ge 0pi​≥0 and ∑ipi=1\sum_i p_i = 1∑i​pi​=1. Added hypotheses: di≥0d_i \ge 0di​≥0 (service times are nonnegative) and, in Proposition 2.1, γ>0\gamma > 0γ>0 (the paper's grade of service).
  • Infrastructure welcome: memorylessness of the Poisson process at a fixed time, Poisson thinning with independent marks, and the finite-sum version of Mathlib's IndepFun.hasLaw_add_poissonMeasure. These are reusable well beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • W. Whitt, Understanding the efficiency of multi-server service systems, Management Science 38(5):708–723, 1992. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.38.5.708
  • S. Halfin and W. Whitt, Heavy-traffic limits for queues with many exponential servers, Operations Research 29(3):567–588, 1981. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.29.3.567
  • W. Feller, An Introduction to Probability Theory and Its Applications, Vol. I, 3rd ed., Wiley, 1968.
  • D. Gross, J. F. Shortle, J. M. Thompson and C. M. Harris, Fundamentals of Queueing Theory, 4th ed., Wiley, 2008. https://doi.org/10.1002/9781118625651
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
Markov ChainStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Random Walks in a Random Environment 3: With One-Way Mirrors σ ∈ {0, θ}, X_n/(n/log_θ n) → ½ in Probability if γθ = 1, and n^(−1/ρ)X_n Has Limit Laws Along Subsequences if γθ > 1Research Paper

Why the walk slows down

A random walk in a random environment uses transition probabilities selected once for each site, rather than probabilities resampled at every step. Even when the site environments are independent and identically distributed, the walker revisits the same local bias whenever it returns to a site. Its long-time motion can therefore differ sharply from that of a walk with a single averaged right-step probability. Solomon’s 1975 paper established the recurrence and speed classification for this one-dimensional model and then examined a two-value example in which some sites are one-way mirrors: the walker can pass through them to the right but cannot cross them to the left. The example isolates how a sequence of random intervals between mirrors produces slow growth and phase-dependent limit laws Solomon 1975, §2.

The present mission concerns §2 of that paper, pp. 10–20. Its central question is how far the walker has traveled after nnn steps when the mean crossing time reaches or exceeds the critical threshold. At criticality, a logarithmic correction replaces ordinary linear speed. Above criticality, the paper gives limits along subsequences whose logarithmic fractional parts approach a fixed phase.

The walk and its mirror environment

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space and let αj\alpha_jαj​, j∈Zj\in\mathbb Zj∈Z, be independent, identically distributed random variables in [0,1][0,1][0,1]. The environment is the complete sequence α=(αj)j∈Z\alpha=(\alpha_j)_{j\in\mathbb Z}α=(αj​)j∈Z​. Conditional on a fixed environment, a nearest-neighbour walk starts at X0=0X_0=0X0​=0 and, from site jjj, moves to j+1j+1j+1 with probability αj\alpha_jαj​ and to j−1j-1j−1 with probability 1−αj1-\alpha_j1−αj​. The annealed probability PPP averages the conditional path law over the environment. In Lean this joint law is specified on every finite path cylinder together with every measurable event of the whole environment, so it determines the dependence between XXX and α\alphaα.

Fix θ>1\theta>1θ>1 and 0<γ<10<\gamma<10<γ<1. Solomon’s example has αj=1\alpha_j=1αj​=1 with probability 1−γ1-\gamma1−γ and αj=(1+θ)−1\alpha_j=(1+\theta)^{-1}αj​=(1+θ)−1 with probability γ\gammaγ. Equivalently, the left-to-right odds ratio σj=(1−αj)/αj\sigma_j=(1-\alpha_j)/\alpha_jσj​=(1−αj​)/αj​ takes values 000 and θ\thetaθ. A site with σj=0\sigma_j=0σj​=0 is a one-way mirror. Write V0=0V_0=0V0​=0 and let VnV_nVn​ be the position of the nnnth mirror strictly to the right of zero. Let TjT_jTj​ be the first time the walk reaches site jjj, with Tj=∞T_j=\inftyTj​=∞ if it never does. For b>0b>0b>0, log⁡bx\log_b xlogb​x means the logarithm in base bbb, and {x}=x−⌊x⌋\{x\}=x-\lfloor x\rfloor{x}=x−⌊x⌋ is the fractional part.

The parameters used below are

ν=2θ(θ−1)2,K=1−γγν,ρ=log⁡1/γθ.\nu=\frac{2\theta}{(\theta-1)^2},\qquad K=\frac{1-\gamma}{\gamma}\nu,\qquad \rho=\log_{1/\gamma}\theta.ν=(θ−1)22θ​,K=γ1−γ​ν,ρ=log1/γ​θ.

When γθ>1\gamma\theta>1γθ>1, the paper specifies a probability law FεF_\varepsilonFε​ on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) by its Laplace transform

∫0∞e−ux dFε(x)=exp⁡[−Ku∑j∈Z(γθ)j−ε1+νuθj−ε],u>0.\int_0^\infty e^{-ux}\,dF_\varepsilon(x)=\exp\left[-Ku\sum_{j\in\mathbb Z}\frac{(\gamma\theta)^{j-\varepsilon}}{1+\nu u\theta^{j-\varepsilon}}\right],\qquad u>0.∫0∞​e−uxdFε​(x)=exp​−Kuj∈Z∑​1+νuθj−ε(γθ)j−ε​​,u>0.

Here Fε(t)F_\varepsilon(t)Fε​(t) also denotes that law’s distribution function at ttt. The bilateral series converges in the supercritical parameter range. The source’s notation uses the same letter for a distribution and its distribution function; the Lean development keeps these roles separate as a measure and its value on (−∞,t](-\infty,t](−∞,t].

Formalization targets

The first clause of Theorem (2.20) is the critical growth law. If γθ=1\gamma\theta=1γθ=1, then

Xnn/log⁡θn→P12.\frac{X_n}{n/\log_\theta n}\xrightarrow{P}\frac12.n/logθ​nXn​​P​21​.

The second clause describes the supercritical case. If γθ>1\gamma\theta>1γθ>1, nk→∞n_k\to\inftynk​→∞, and {log⁡θnk}→ε\{\log_\theta n_k\}\to\varepsilon{logθ​nk​}→ε, then for each x>0x>0x>0,

P ⁣(nk−1/ρXnk<x)⟶1−Fλ(x) ⁣(((1−γ)x)−ρ),λ(x)=ε+log⁡1/γ((1−γ)x).P\!\left(n_k^{-1/\rho}X_{n_k}<x\right)\longrightarrow 1-F_{\lambda(x)}\!\left(((1-\gamma)x)^{-\rho}\right), \qquad \lambda(x)=\varepsilon+\log_{1/\gamma}((1-\gamma)x).P(nk−1/ρ​Xnk​​<x)⟶1−Fλ(x)​(((1−γ)x)−ρ),λ(x)=ε+log1/γ​((1−γ)x).

Both clauses are the goal. The milestones record the transform identity of Lemma (2.5), its approximation and scaling limits in Lemmas (2.6)–(2.7), the mirror passage-time limits of Lemma (2.10), and the ordinary passage-time limits of Theorem (2.18). The fractional part in the goal uses base θ\thetaθ; the two passage-time results use base 1/γ1/\gamma1/γ, exactly as printed Solomon 1975, pp. 12–19.

What the result gives

The critical law identifies the constant in the growth scale n/log⁡θnn/\log_\theta nn/logθ​n. The supercritical law shows that a single power normalization n1/ρn^{1/\rho}n1/ρ does not erase the logarithmic phase of the environment: the limiting distribution depends on the phase approached by the chosen subsequence. These assertions describe the position XnX_nXn​ itself, rather than only the time needed to reach a distant site. They complement the paper’s general speed theorem by resolving the zero-speed behavior in a concrete model Solomon 1975, Theorems (1.16) and (2.20).

The results are proved in the 1975 paper; the open work here is machine checking their definitions, statements, and proofs. The development also yields reusable interfaces for a nearest-neighbour chain specified by cylinder probabilities, first-passage times that can be infinite, and Laplace-transform arguments for random time changes. The mission’s statements currently compile locally with proof placeholders, so they are formalization targets rather than machine-checked theorems.

Where the difficulty lies

The one-way mirrors create independent, identically distributed blocks of crossing times, but those times have tails governed by the random spacing between mirrors. At γθ=1\gamma\theta=1γθ=1, their accumulation produces a logarithmic correction; at γθ>1\gamma\theta>1γθ>1, the underlying geometric scales preserve the fractional part of a logarithm. An ordinary law of large numbers for passage times therefore cannot supply both limits. Moreover, a limit for passage times to the random mirror positions VnV_nVn​ does not immediately give a limit for passage times to deterministic sites, and converting a passage-time limit into a position limit requires control of the inverse time change. The source separates these tasks across the milestone results Solomon 1975, pp. 11–20.

Formalization scope

The Lean environment is the pinned Mathlib revision 0df444a360eaa60ab8c11dca51a86af692955474. The position and environment are integer-indexed; time is natural-number-indexed. The one-way-mirror parameter range is θ>1\theta>1θ>1, 0<γ<10<\gamma<10<γ<1, γθ≥1\gamma\theta\ge1γθ≥1. The strict bounds on γ\gammaγ make both atom probabilities meaningful and the logarithm base 1/γ1/\gamma1/γ valid. The source uses these bounds implicitly. All probabilities concern the annealed joint law, not an arbitrary process with the same one-time marginals.

First-passage times are extended natural numbers, with infinity on paths that never hit the target. The real-valued limits convert finite passage times to real numbers; under the stated model, infinite passage times form a null event. The location of a nonexistent next mirror is assigned zero for a total Lean function, again only on a null event in this model. The Laplace transform of an infinite passage time is defined as zero. Convergence in probability uses TendstoInMeasure; convergence in law is expressed by convergence of distribution functions at continuity points. The limit-law family is constrained to probability measures supported on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) with the exact transform (2.12), preventing a degenerate or unrelated choice of FFF.

A complete proof needs measurable cylinder laws, independence of the mirror gaps, hitting-time and transform calculations, asymptotics of one-sided and bilateral series, distributional convergence from Laplace transforms, and inversion from passage time to position. Work on any of these components is in scope. The statement keeps both source regimes and every constant; replacing the joint walk law by independent marginals or choosing an arbitrary limit distribution would change the theorem.

Selected references

  • Fred Solomon, Random Walks in a Random Environment, The Annals of Probability 3(1):1–31, 1975. DOI: 10.1214/aop/1176996444.
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Regenerative Stochastic Processes 4: Cumulative Processes on the Same Regeneration Points Are Jointly Asymptotically NormalResearch Paper

Motivation

Many quantities in queueing, inventory and reliability models are additive functionals of a regenerative process: the total work processed by a server up to time ttt, the cost accumulated by an inventory policy, the time a machine spends broken. Each such quantity grows by independent, identically distributed amounts over the cycles between successive regeneration points. W. L. Smith called these cumulative processes in Regenerative stochastic processes (Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A, 1955), the paper that introduced the term "regenerative process" and laid out its limit theory. Long-run averages of such quantities are estimated by simulation and by statistical observation of real systems. Confidence intervals for these estimates, and the regenerative method of simulation output analysis, rest on the central limit theorem for cumulative processes. When several quantities are estimated at once (a ratio of two rewards, a vector of costs), they rest on its joint version for several cumulative processes driven by the same regenerations.

Timeline:

  • 1949. Feller proves the central limit theorem for the renewal counting process.
  • 1952. Anscombe proves that a central limit theorem survives replacing the number of summands by a random index mtm_tmt​ with mt/ψ(t)→1m_t/\psi(t)\to 1mt​/ψ(t)→1 in probability, without independence between the index and the summands (Anscombe, Proc. Camb. Phil. Soc. 48, 1952).
  • 1955. Smith extends Anscombe's theorem to random vectors and deduces the univariate (Theorem 9, Corollary 9·1) and multivariate (Theorem 10) central limit theorems for cumulative processes (Smith 1955).

Setting

On a probability space (Ω,P)(\Omega, P)(Ω,P), let t1,t2,…t_1, t_2, \dotst1​,t2​,… be independent, identically distributed, non-negative random variables with P{t1=0}<1P\{t_1 = 0\} < 1P{t1​=0}<1 (a renewal process), and t0=0t_0 = 0t0​=0. The regeneration epochs are Tk=t0+t1+⋯+tkT_k = t_0 + t_1 + \dots + t_kTk​=t0​+t1​+⋯+tk​ (k≥0k \ge 0k≥0), and ntn_tnt​ is the number of epochs in [0,t][0,t][0,t] (in Smith's words, the greatest kkk with Tk−1≤tT_{k-1} \le tTk−1​≤t, where T−1=0T_{-1} = 0T−1​=0). Write μr=Et1r\mu_r = E t_1^rμr​=Et1r​.

A real process wtw_twt​ with w0=0w_0 = 0w0​=0 is a cumulative process if (C1) its cycle increments yn=Δnwt=wTn−wTn−1y_n = \Delta_n w_t = w_{T_n} - w_{T_{n-1}}yn​=Δn​wt​=wTn​​−wTn−1​​, n≥1n \ge 1n≥1, are i.i.d., and (C2) with probability one its paths have bounded variation on every finite interval. The variation process w~t=∫0t∣dwt∣\tilde w_t = \int_0^t |\mathrm d w_t|w~t​=∫0t​∣dwt​∣ has increments y~n=Δnw~t\tilde y_n = \Delta_n \tilde w_ty~​n​=Δn​w~t​. Moments are written κr=Eynr\kappa_r = E y_n^rκr​=Eynr​ and κ~r=Ey~n r\tilde\kappa_r = E \tilde y_n^{\,r}κ~r​=Ey~​nr​.

MMM cumulative processes wt(1),…,wt(M)w^{(1)}_t, \dots, w^{(M)}_twt(1)​,…,wt(M)​ are based on the same sequence of regeneration points when the cycle vectors (tn,yn(1),…,yn(M),y~n(1),…,y~n(M))(t_n, y^{(1)}_n, \dots, y^{(M)}_n, \tilde y^{(1)}_n, \dots, \tilde y^{(M)}_n)(tn​,yn(1)​,…,yn(M)​,y~​n(1)​,…,y~​n(M)​) are i.i.d. in nnn. Put κ1(i)=Ey1(i)\kappa^{(i)}_1 = E y^{(i)}_1κ1(i)​=Ey1(i)​. The covariance matrices are

akl=cov⁡(y1(k),y1(l)),bkl=cov⁡(y1(k)−κ1(k)μ1t1,  y1(l)−κ1(l)μ1t1).a_{kl} = \operatorname{cov}(y^{(k)}_1, y^{(l)}_1), \qquad b_{kl} = \operatorname{cov}\Big(y^{(k)}_1 - \tfrac{\kappa^{(k)}_1}{\mu_1} t_1,\; y^{(l)}_1 - \tfrac{\kappa^{(l)}_1}{\mu_1} t_1\Big).akl​=cov(y1(k)​,y1(l)​),bkl​=cov(y1(k)​−μ1​κ1(k)​​t1​,y1(l)​−μ1​κ1(l)​​t1​).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 10

If μ1<∞\mu_1 < \inftyμ1​<∞ and E(y~1(i))2<∞E(\tilde y^{(i)}_1)^2 < \inftyE(y~​1(i)​)2<∞ for every iii, then as t→∞t \to \inftyt→∞

(wt(i)−κ1(i)nt(t/μ1)1/2)i=1M→ d N(0,a),\left(\frac{w^{(i)}_t - \kappa^{(i)}_1 n_t}{(t/\mu_1)^{1/2}}\right)_{i=1}^M \xrightarrow{\ d\ } \mathcal N(0, a),((t/μ1​)1/2wt(i)​−κ1(i)​nt​​)i=1M​ d ​N(0,a),

and if in addition μ2<∞\mu_2 < \inftyμ2​<∞,

(wt(i)−(κ1(i)/μ1) t(t/μ1)1/2)i=1M→ d N(0,b).\left(\frac{w^{(i)}_t - (\kappa^{(i)}_1/\mu_1)\,t}{(t/\mu_1)^{1/2}}\right)_{i=1}^M \xrightarrow{\ d\ } \mathcal N(0, b).((t/μ1​)1/2wt(i)​−(κ1(i)​/μ1​)t​)i=1M​ d ​N(0,b).

Milestones

  • The renewal strong law nt/t→1/μ1n_t/t \to 1/\mu_1nt​/t→1/μ1​ almost surely (§5·3).
  • Lemma 8: if μ1<∞\mu_1 < \inftyμ1​<∞ and κ~p<∞\tilde\kappa_p < \inftyκ~p​<∞, then (wt+Zt−wt)/t1/p→0(w_{t+Z_t} - w_t)/t^{1/p} \to 0(wt+Zt​​−wt​)/t1/p→0 almost surely, where Zt=∑1nt+1ti−tZ_t = \sum_1^{n_t+1} t_i - tZt​=∑1nt​+1​ti​−t.
  • Theorem B (Anscombe): P{∑1mtyi/(σψ(t)1/2)≤α}→Φ(α)P\{\sum_1^{m_t} y_i/(\sigma\psi(t)^{1/2}) \le \alpha\} \to \Phi(\alpha)P{∑1mt​​yi​/(σψ(t)1/2)≤α}→Φ(α) for i.i.d. centred yiy_iyi​ with variance σ2>0\sigma^2 > 0σ2>0 and mt/ψ(t)→1m_t/\psi(t) \to 1mt​/ψ(t)→1 in probability.
  • Its MMM-dimensional form (§5·4): ψ(t)−1/2∑1mtyj→dN(0,a)\psi(t)^{-1/2}\sum_1^{m_t} \mathbf y_j \xrightarrow{d} \mathcal N(0, a)ψ(t)−1/2∑1mt​​yj​d​N(0,a) for i.i.d. centred random vectors.
  • Theorem 9: if Ey1=0E y_1 = 0Ey1​=0 and var⁡y1=σ2>0\operatorname{var} y_1 = \sigma^2 > 0vary1​=σ2>0, then P{wt/(σ(t/μ1)1/2)≤α}→Φ(α)P\{w_t/(\sigma(t/\mu_1)^{1/2}) \le \alpha\} \to \Phi(\alpha)P{wt​/(σ(t/μ1​)1/2)≤α}→Φ(α).
  • Corollary 9·1: the univariate forms of both assertions of the goal, with normalisations σ=(κ2−κ12)1/2\sigma = (\kappa_2 - \kappa_1^2)^{1/2}σ=(κ2​−κ12​)1/2 and γ=var⁡(y1−(κ1/μ1)t1)\gamma = \operatorname{var}(y_1 - (\kappa_1/\mu_1)t_1)γ=var(y1​−(κ1​/μ1​)t1​).

Significance

Theorem 10 is the multivariate central limit theorem for regenerative processes. Its second assertion with M=2M = 2M=2 and the delta method gives the asymptotic normality of ratio estimators wt(1)/wt(2)w^{(1)}_t / w^{(2)}_twt(1)​/wt(2)​, the basis of the regenerative method of simulation output analysis. With wt=ntw_t = n_twt​=nt​, Corollary 9·1 recovers Feller's central limit theorem for renewal processes, which Smith points out (p. 9). The first assertion, with the random centring κ1nt\kappa_1 n_tκ1​nt​, needs only μ1<∞\mu_1 < \inftyμ1​<∞, which matters for heavy-tailed cycle lengths.

The results are classical and proved, and none of them is formalized. Mathlib has the central limit theorem for i.i.d. real sums with a deterministic number of terms and multivariate Gaussian laws, but no random-index central limit theorem, no renewal counting process and no regenerative process. A formal development would supply Anscombe's theorem (useful well beyond renewal theory, for sequential analysis and random sums), the renewal strong law and a reusable model of cumulative processes.

Difficulty

The obvious argument writes wtw_twt​ as the sum of the first ntn_tnt​ cycle increments plus a remainder and applies the classical central limit theorem. This fails at two points. First, the number of summands ntn_tnt​ is random and depends on the summands themselves (cycle lengths and rewards are typically dependent), so the classical theorem with a deterministic index does not apply and conditioning on ntn_tnt​ destroys the i.i.d. structure. Anscombe's theorem is needed exactly for this; it requires control of the partial sums uniformly over a window of indices around t/μ1t/\mu_1t/μ1​, not at a single index. Second, the remainder over the incomplete cycle at time ttt must be shown negligible on the scale t\sqrt tt​ using only a second moment of the cycle variation; Lemma 8 does this almost surely. For the vector statement, the scalar theorem must be lifted to convergence in distribution in RM\mathbb R^MRM with a possibly degenerate covariance matrix, where the scalar theorem's hypothesis σ>0\sigma > 0σ>0 can fail along some directions.

Formalization scope

  • Time is real; every limit is along t→∞t \to \inftyt→∞ in R\mathbb RR. Processes are functions w:R→Ω→Rw : \mathbb R \to \Omega \to \mathbb Rw:R→Ω→R (or a family indexed by Fin M); cycle lengths are a sequence N→Ω→R\mathbb N \to \Omega \to \mathbb RN→Ω→R with t0=0t_0 = 0t0​=0.
  • ntn_tnt​ is a natural number, the number of epochs Tj≤tT_j \le tTj​≤t; on the null event where infinitely many epochs are ≤t\le t≤t it is 000. Finiteness is never assumed.
  • w~t\tilde w_tw~t​ is the total variation (eVariationOn) of the path on [0,t][0,t][0,t], set to 000 for all ttt on paths of infinite variation, as Smith allows.
  • Condition (C1) is read for the whole cycle vector (tn,yn,y~n)(t_n, y_n, \tilde y_n)(tn​,yn​,y~​n​). No independence between components is assumed. Assuming the cycle length independent of the rewards, or the components independent, would make aaa diagonal or force bbb into a special form; that trivialization is ruled out.
  • "Jointly normally distributed with covariance matrix aaa" is TendstoInDistribution to multivariateGaussian 0 a on EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin M). The matrices aaa and bbb are defined as covariance matrices, hence positive semidefinite, so the limit is a genuine (possibly degenerate) Gaussian law and not Mathlib's Dirac fallback for non-PSD input.
  • The scalar statements keep the paper's form: convergence of P{⋅≤α}P\{\cdot \le \alpha\}P{⋅≤α} to Φ(α)=\Phi(\alpha) =Φ(α)= cdf (gaussianReal 0 1) α for every real α\alphaα. The paper's implicit σ>0\sigma > 0σ>0 and γ>0\gamma > 0γ>0 are explicit hypotheses; without them the quotients are 000 in Lean and the statements would be false.
  • μ1<∞\mu_1 < \inftyμ1​<∞, μ2<∞\mu_2 < \inftyμ2​<∞ and Ey~2<∞E\tilde y^2 < \inftyEy~​2<∞ are Integrable hypotheses, never encoded through the value of an integral.

Contributions welcome: a proof of Anscombe's theorem from Mathlib's central limit theorem; the renewal strong law from strong_law_ae; measurability lemmas for ntn_tnt​ and w~t\tilde w_tw~t​; the Cramér–Wold step.

Selected references

  • W. L. Smith, Regenerative stochastic processes, Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A 232(1188):6–31, 1955. https://doi.org/10.1098/rspa.1955.0198
  • F. J. Anscombe, Large-sample theory of sequential estimation, Proc. Cambridge Philos. Soc. 48, 600, 1952 (cited in Smith 1955, p. 31).
  • W. Feller, Fluctuation theory of recurrent events, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 67, 98, 1949 (cited in Smith 1955, p. 31).
  • J. L. Doob, Renewal theory from the point of view of the theory of probability, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 63, 422, 1948 (cited in Smith 1955, p. 31).
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
Machine LearningStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Empirical Bernstein Bounds and Sample Variance Penalization: Sample Variance Penalization Has Excess Risk at Most √(32V(f*,μ)ln(3M(n)/δ)/n) + 22ln(3M(n)/δ)/(n−1) (Theorem 15)Research Paper

Motivation

Confidence bounds for the mean of a bounded random variable are the basic tool for certifying learned hypotheses, stopping sampling procedures and running bandit algorithms. Hoeffding's inequality gives an interval of width of order 1/n\sqrt{1/n}1/n​ whatever the variance. Bennett's and Bernstein's inequalities do better for low-variance variables, with width of order VZ/n+1/n\sqrt{\mathbb V Z/n} + 1/nVZ/n​+1/n, but the variance VZ\mathbb V ZVZ is unknown, so the bound cannot be evaluated from data.

Maurer and Pontil (arXiv:0907.3740v1, COLT 2009) prove empirical Bernstein bounds, in which the variance is replaced by the observable sample variance at the cost of a slightly larger 1/n1/n1/n term. They extend these bounds uniformly over infinite function classes whose complexity is controlled by a growth function. The uniform bound then suggests a learning rule, sample variance penalization (SVP): minimize the empirical risk plus a multiple of the empirical standard deviation. The paper's final result bounds the excess risk of SVP in terms of the variance of an optimal hypothesis. An analogous empirical Bernstein bound was given by Audibert, Munos and Szepesvári for multi-armed bandits, and Mnih, Szepesvári and Audibert (2008) used such bounds for stopping rules. Variance-penalized risk minimization was later studied as a convex surrogate by Namkoong and Duchi (2017).

Setting

For a vector x=(x1,…,xn)x = (x_1,\dots,x_n)x=(x1​,…,xn​) of reals, the sample mean and sample variance are

Pn(x)=1n∑i=1nxi,Vn(x)=1n(n−1)∑i,j=1n(xi−xj)22.P_n(x) = \frac1n\sum_{i=1}^n x_i, \qquad V_n(x) = \frac{1}{n(n-1)}\sum_{i,j=1}^n\frac{(x_i-x_j)^2}{2}.Pn​(x)=n1​i=1∑n​xi​,Vn​(x)=n(n−1)1​i,j=1∑n​2(xi​−xj​)2​.

Let μ\muμ be a probability distribution on a set X\mathcal XX, and F\mathcal FF a class of hypotheses (loss functions) f:X→[0,1]f:\mathcal X\to[0,1]f:X→[0,1]. For f∈Ff\in\mathcal Ff∈F, its risk is P(f,μ)=Ef(X)P(f,\mu) = \mathbb E f(X)P(f,μ)=Ef(X) and its variance is V(f,μ)=Vf(X)V(f,\mu)=\mathbb V f(X)V(f,μ)=Vf(X), with X∼μX\sim\muX∼μ. For a sample X=(X1,…,Xn)∼μn\mathbf X = (X_1,\dots,X_n)\sim\mu^nX=(X1​,…,Xn​)∼μn, Pn(f,X)P_n(f,\mathbf X)Pn​(f,X) and Vn(f,X)V_n(f,\mathbf X)Vn​(f,X) are PnP_nPn​ and VnV_nVn​ of the vector (f(X1),…,f(Xn))(f(X_1),\dots,f(X_n))(f(X1​),…,f(Xn​)).

The complexity of F\mathcal FF enters through the growth function. For x∈Xmx\in\mathcal X^mx∈Xm let F(x)={(f(x1),…,f(xm)):f∈F}⊆Rm\mathcal F(x) = \{(f(x_1),\dots,f(x_m)) : f\in\mathcal F\}\subseteq\mathbb R^mF(x)={(f(x1​),…,f(xm​)):f∈F}⊆Rm, and let N(ϵ,A,∥⋅∥∞)\mathcal N(\epsilon, A, \|\cdot\|_\infty)N(ϵ,A,∥⋅∥∞​) be the least number of sup-norm ϵ\epsilonϵ-balls centred in AAA that cover AAA. Then

N∞(ϵ,F,m)=sup⁡x∈XmN(ϵ,F(x),∥⋅∥∞),M(n)=10 N∞(1/n,F,2n).\mathcal N_\infty(\epsilon,\mathcal F,m) = \sup_{x\in\mathcal X^m}\mathcal N(\epsilon,\mathcal F(x),\|\cdot\|_\infty), \qquad \mathcal M(n) = 10\,\mathcal N_\infty(1/n,\mathcal F,2n).N∞​(ϵ,F,m)=x∈Xmsup​N(ϵ,F(x),∥⋅∥∞​),M(n)=10N∞​(1/n,F,2n).

For λ≥0\lambda\ge0λ≥0, sample variance penalization selects

SVPλ(X)=arg⁡min⁡f∈F  Pn(f,X)+λVn(f,X)n.SVP_\lambda(\mathbf X) = \arg\min_{f\in\mathcal F}\; P_n(f,\mathbf X) + \lambda\sqrt{\frac{V_n(f,\mathbf X)}{n}}.SVPλ​(X)=argf∈Fmin​Pn​(f,X)+λnVn​(f,X)​​.

With λ=0\lambda = 0λ=0 it is empirical risk minimization.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 15 (p. 6)

Fix δ∈(0,1)\delta\in(0,1)δ∈(0,1), n≥2n\ge2n≥2, λ=18ln⁡(3M(n)/δ)\lambda = \sqrt{18\ln(3\mathcal M(n)/\delta)}λ=18ln(3M(n)/δ)​ and any f∗∈Ff^*\in\mathcal Ff∗∈F. With probability at least 1−δ1-\delta1−δ in X∼μn\mathbf X\sim\mu^nX∼μn,

P(SVPλ(X),μ)−P(f∗,μ)≤32 V(f∗,μ)ln⁡(3M(n)/δ)n+22ln⁡(3M(n)/δ)n−1.P(SVP_\lambda(\mathbf X),\mu) - P(f^*,\mu) \le \sqrt{\frac{32\,V(f^*,\mu)\ln(3\mathcal M(n)/\delta)}{n}} + \frac{22\ln(3\mathcal M(n)/\delta)}{n-1}.P(SVPλ​(X),μ)−P(f∗,μ)≤n32V(f∗,μ)ln(3M(n)/δ)​​+n−122ln(3M(n)/δ)​.

The constants are the paper's. The goal is stated for an arbitrary comparator f∗f^*f∗, so it covers an optimal one when one exists.

Milestones

In the order of the proof:

  • the fourth-moment inequality (Lemma 8, Corollary 9);
  • the self-bounding concentration inequality the paper cites (Theorem 7, lower and upper tails);
  • the tails (5)–(6) of the sample variance and the standard-deviation bounds of Theorem 10;
  • the comparison W≤EVnW\le\mathbb EV_nW≤EVn​ of (7)–(9);
  • Bennett's inequality for independent variables, together with the i.i.d. Theorem 3;
  • the empirical Bernstein bounds (Theorem 4 for i.i.d. variables, Theorem 11 for independent ones);
  • the Lipschitz properties of the confidence functionals Φ,Ψ\Phi,\PsiΦ,Ψ (Lemma 12);
  • the symmetrization lemma (Lemma 13) and the swap bound (Lemma 14);
  • the uniform bound, Theorem 6:
Pr⁡{∃f∈F: P(f,μ)−Pn(f,X)>18Vn(f,X)ln⁡(M(n)/δ)n+15ln⁡(M(n)/δ)n−1}≤δ(n≥16).\Pr\Big\{\exists f\in\mathcal F:\ P(f,\mu)-P_n(f,\mathbf X) > \sqrt{\tfrac{18V_n(f,\mathbf X)\ln(\mathcal M(n)/\delta)}{n}} + \tfrac{15\ln(\mathcal M(n)/\delta)}{n-1}\Big\}\le\delta \quad (n\ge16).Pr{∃f∈F: P(f,μ)−Pn​(f,X)>n18Vn​(f,X)ln(M(n)/δ)​​+n−115ln(M(n)/δ)​}≤δ(n≥16).

Significance

Theorem 15 separates SVP from empirical risk minimization. If an optimal hypothesis has zero variance, the excess risk of SVP decays as ln⁡M(n)/n\ln\mathcal M(n)/nlnM(n)/n; for a finite class M(n)\mathcal M(n)M(n) does not depend on nnn and the rate is 1/n1/n1/n. The paper gives a two-hypothesis example where empirical risk minimization cannot beat order 1/n1/\sqrt n1/n​ (Section 4). No convexity of the class or special structure of the loss is needed beyond the growth-function bound. Theorems 4, 10 and 11 are reused well beyond this paper, in bandit algorithms, racing and stopping procedures, and certified estimation.

All results of the paper are proved there, apart from Theorem 7, which is cited from Maurer (2006), and Bennett's inequality for non-identical variables, which is cited from McDiarmid's survey Concentration (1998). This mission produces machine-checked statements of the chain, from the self-bounding inequality to the excess-risk bound. To our knowledge, none of these results has a machine-checked proof. On this platform, the namkoong-2017 series has an open re-derivation of Theorem 6 with other constants and a 1/n1/n1/n-normalized variance (VarianceRegularization.Covering.uniform_empirical_bernstein). It is related work, not the printed theorem.

Difficulty

Bennett's inequality cannot be applied directly, because its variance term is not observable. Substituting the sample variance requires a concentration inequality for VnV_nVn​ itself with the right dependence on EVn\mathbb EV_nEVn​, and VnV_nVn​ is a U-statistic, not a sum of independent terms: bounded-differences inequalities give only a variance-free rate, which is too weak.

The uniform extension does not follow from a union bound once the class is infinite. The classical double-sample argument compares a sample with a ghost sample through a linear functional; the empirical standard deviation is nonlinear, so that comparison does not go through unchanged. After symmetrization the coordinates are independent but not identically distributed, so i.i.d. concentration results do not apply to them.

Formalization scope

Conventions:

  • The source is arXiv:0907.3740v1. It has no printed page numbers, so every page cited is the PDF page.
  • Indices i=1,…,ni=1,\dots,ni=1,…,n are i : Fin n.
  • A sample is a vector Fin n → 𝒳 under the product measure Measure.pi, with i.i.d. coordinates Measure.pi (fun _ => μ) or independent ones Measure.pi μs. Variables "with values in [0,1][0,1][0,1]" have laws giving zero mass outside [0,1][0,1][0,1].
  • "With probability at least 1−δ1-\delta1−δ, AAA" is written as μn{¬A}≤δ\mu^n\{\neg A\}\le\deltaμn{¬A}≤δ. For a set that is not measurable this is the outer measure.
  • PnP_nPn​ is the published VarianceRegularization.Expansion.empMean. VnV_nVn​ is a local sampleVar with the 1/(n(n−1))1/(n(n-1))1/(n(n−1)) normalization. V(f,μ)V(f,\mu)V(f,μ) is Mathlib's variance.
  • The covering number is Mathlib's Metric.coveringNumber (closed balls, centres in the set, values in N∪{∞}\mathbb N\cup\{\infty\}N∪{∞}).
  • Pr⁡σ\Pr_\sigmaPrσ​ and Eσ\mathbb E_\sigmaEσ​ are uniform averages over the 2n2^n2n sign vectors.
  • SVPλSVP_\lambdaSVPλ​ is an arbitrary selector that returns, for every sample, a minimizer in F\mathcal FF of the penalized objective. Every minimizer is covered.

Added hypotheses and repaired statements, each disclosed in the item:

  • The paper says "questions of measurability will be ignored throughout". This is made precise as follows:
    • Theorems 6 and 15: F\mathcal FF is countable and its members are measurable.
    • Lemma 13: the function is measurable.
    • Theorem 7: ZZZ is measurable, integrable and nonnegative, and its coordinate-wise infima are measurable.
  • Theorems 6 and 15 assume N∞(1/n,F,2n)<∞\mathcal N_\infty(1/n,\mathcal F,2n)<\inftyN∞​(1/n,F,2n)<∞. With an infinite value the printed bound is vacuous.
  • Theorems 4 and 11 and Lemmas 12 and 14 add n≥2n\ge2n≥2. Theorem 3 and Bennett's display add n≥1n\ge1n≥1. Without these, Lean's convention 1/0=01/0=01/0=0 makes the printed formulas false at the excluded nnn.
  • Corollary 9's "set" {x1,…,xn}\{x_1,\dots,x_n\}{x1​,…,xn​} is read as a list, so repetitions are allowed.

Ruled-out trivializations:

  • SVP is not defined as the comparator f∗f^*f∗.
  • λ\lambdaλ is pinned to 18ln⁡(3M(n)/δ)\sqrt{18\ln(3\mathcal M(n)/\delta)}18ln(3M(n)/δ)​.
  • VnV_nVn​ is the sample variance, not the true variance.
  • No measurability of the bad event or of the selector is assumed.

A complete development needs the following:

  • the entropy method for self-bounding functions (Theorem 7);
  • Bennett's inequality for independent non-identical bounded variables;
  • product-measure symmetrization;
  • covering-number bookkeeping.

The concentration results of Section 2 and the symmetrization lemma are reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of any milestone are welcome. Theorem 7 and Bennett's inequality are natural standalone contributions.

Selected references

  • A. Maurer, M. Pontil, Empirical Bernstein Bounds and Sample Variance Penalization, COLT 2009; arXiv:0907.3740v1, 2009. https://arxiv.org/abs/0907.3740
  • A. Maurer, Concentration inequalities for functions of independent variables, Random Structures & Algorithms 29, 121–138, 2006. https://doi.org/10.1002/rsa.20105
  • C. McDiarmid, Concentration, in Probabilistic Methods for Algorithmic Discrete Mathematics, Springer, 1998.
  • J.-Y. Audibert, R. Munos, Cs. Szepesvári, Exploration–exploitation trade-off using variance estimates in multi-armed bandits, Theoretical Computer Science 410(19), 2009. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.tcs.2009.01.016
  • V. Mnih, Cs. Szepesvári, J.-Y. Audibert, Empirical Bernstein stopping, ICML 2008. https://doi.org/10.1145/1390156.1390241
  • W. Hoeffding, Probability inequalities for sums of bounded random variables, JASA 58, 1963. https://doi.org/10.1080/01621459.1963.10500830
  • H. Namkoong, J. C. Duchi, Variance-based regularization with convex objectives, NeurIPS 2017; arXiv:1610.02581. https://arxiv.org/abs/1610.02581
21 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimizationStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

A 2-Approximation Algorithm for Stochastic Inventory Control Models with Lost Sales: The Dual-Balancing Policy Costs at Most Twice Any Nonanticipatory Policy under Independent DemandsResearch Paper

Motivation

Inventory systems in which unmet demand is lost, not backlogged, are the norm in retail: a customer who finds an empty shelf buys elsewhere. With a positive lead time LLL between ordering and delivery, the optimal policy for such a system depends on the entire pipeline of outstanding orders, so dynamic programming is intractable beyond small LLL. Optimal policies are not of base-stock type, and for decades no policy with a provable guarantee on its expected cost was known for this model.

Levi, Janakiraman and Nagarajan (Math. Oper. Res. 33(2), 2008) gave the first such guarantee. Their dual-balancing policy balances, in every period, the expected holding cost against the expected lost-sales penalty of the units ordered now, and it costs at most twice as much as an optimal policy.

Timeline.

  • 2007. Levi, Pál, Roundy and Shmoys (Math. Oper. Res. 32(2)) introduce marginal cost accounting and the dual-balancing policy for the backlogging model, with a worst-case guarantee of 2.
  • 2008. Levi, Janakiraman and Nagarajan extend the guarantee to lost sales (this mission). In their model the truncated inventory positions of the two policies can cross back and forth inside a lead time, which the backlogging argument never meets.
  • 2009. Huh, Janakiraman, Muckstadt and Rusmevichientong (Management Science, 2009) prove that order-up-to policies are asymptotically optimal in the lost-sales model as the penalty cost grows.
  • 2021 onward. Xin (Oper. Res., 2021; SSRN 7134538) analyses capped base-stock policies for i.i.d. lost-sales demand, culminating in a 2.33-approximation guarantee for that policy class, whose main theorem is proved on Prove2Me.

Page and display numbers in this mission refer to the authors' accepted manuscript (28 pages, pp. 1–28), not to the journal's pages 351–374.

Setting

Periods are t=1,…,Tt=1,\dots,Tt=1,…,T. An order Qs≥0Q_s\ge0Qs​≥0 placed in period sss arrives at the start of period s+Ls+Ls+L, where L≥1L\ge1L≥1 is an integer. Before the horizon there are x0≥0x_0\ge0x0​≥0 units on hand and pipeline orders Qj=qj≥0Q_j=q_j\ge0Qj​=qj​≥0 for 1−L≤j≤01-L\le j\le01−L≤j≤0. Demands D1,…,DT≥0D_1,\dots,D_T\ge0D1​,…,DT​≥0 have finite means. The information Fs\mathcal F_sFs​ available at the start of period sss contains D1,…,Ds−1D_1,\dots,D_{s-1}D1​,…,Ds−1​ and possibly more. A feasible policy chooses QsQ_sQs​ as an Fs\mathcal F_sFs​-measurable quantity.

The on-hand inventory ItI_tIt​ at the start of period ttt, after the arrival, satisfies I1=x0+Q1−LI_1=x_0+Q_{1-L}I1​=x0​+Q1−L​ and

It+1=(It−Dt)++Qt+1−L.I_{t+1}=(I_t-D_t)^+ + Q_{t+1-L}.It+1​=(It​−Dt​)++Qt+1−L​.

Demand (Dt−It)+(D_t-I_t)^+(Dt​−It​)+ is lost. Costs are a holding rate ht≥0h_t\ge0ht​≥0, a lost-sales penalty pt≥0p_t\ge0pt​≥0 and an ordering cost ct≥0c_t\ge0ct​≥0 per unit, where ptp_tpt​ and ctc_tct​ are non-increasing in ttt.

Marginal cost accounting. Under first-ordered-first-consumed bookkeeping, HsH_sHs​ is the ordering cost csQsc_sQ_scs​Qs​ plus the holding cost that the QsQ_sQs​ units incur until the end of the horizon, and Πs=ps+L(Ds+L−Is+L)+\Pi_s=p_{s+L}(D_{s+L}-I_{s+L})^+Πs​=ps+L​(Ds+L​−Is+L​)+ is the lost-sales penalty in the period in which they arrive. The cost of a policy PPP is

C(P)=∑s=1T−L(HsP+ΠsP).\mathcal C(P)=\sum_{s=1}^{T-L}\bigl(H^P_s+\Pi^P_s\bigr).C(P)=s=1∑T−L​(HsP​+ΠsP​).

It omits only costs that are the same for every policy.

The truncated inventory position of period sss with respect to t≤st\le st≤s is Yst=Is+∑j=s+1−LtQjY_{st}=I_s+\sum_{j=s+1-L}^{t}Q_jYst​=Is​+∑j=s+1−Lt​Qj​. For two policies BBB and PPP, the set TH\mathcal T_HTH​ holds the periods t≤T−Lt\le T-Lt≤T−L with YstB<YstPY^B_{st}<Y^P_{st}YstB​<YstP​ for every s∈[t,t+L]s\in[t,t+L]s∈[t,t+L], and TΠ\mathcal T_\PiTΠ​ holds the remaining periods t≤T−Lt\le T-Lt≤T−L.

A dual-balancing policy BBB orders, in each period t≤T−Lt\le T-Lt≤T−L, the amount that equalises the two conditional expectations

E[HtB∣Ft]=E[ΠtB∣Ft]=:Zt.E[H^B_t\mid\mathcal F_t]=E[\Pi^B_t\mid\mathcal F_t]=:Z_t.E[HtB​∣Ft​]=E[ΠtB​∣Ft​]=:Zt​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.1

If demands are independent, then for every feasible policy PPP

E[C(B)]≤2 E[C(P)].E[\mathcal C(B)]\le 2\,E[\mathcal C(P)].E[C(B)]≤2E[C(P)].

Comparing with every feasible PPP, rather than with an optimal policy, gives the guarantee without assuming that an optimum is attained.

Milestones, in attack order

  1. (11) For t≤s≤t+Lt\le s\le t+Lt≤s≤t+L, It+L=Yst−D[s,t+L)+∑r=st+L−1(Dr−Ir)+I_{t+L}=Y_{st}-D_{[s,t+L)}+\sum_{r=s}^{t+L-1}(D_r-I_r)^+It+L​=Yst​−D[s,t+L)​+∑r=st+L−1​(Dr​−Ir​)+.
  2. Lemma 3.2. On every sample path, ∑t∈THHtB≤∑tHtP\sum_{t\in\mathcal T_H}H^B_t\le\sum_{t}H^P_t∑t∈TH​​HtB​≤∑t​HtP​.
  3. Lemma 3.3. On every sample path, ∑t∈TΠΠtB≤∑tΠtP\sum_{t\in\mathcal T_\Pi}\Pi^B_t\le\sum_{t}\Pi^P_t∑t∈TΠ​​ΠtB​≤∑t​ΠtP​.
  4. (14) E[C(P)]≥E[∑t(1t∈THHtB+1t∈TΠΠtB)]E[\mathcal C(P)]\ge E\bigl[\sum_t(\mathbb 1_{t\in\mathcal T_H}H^B_t+\mathbb 1_{t\in\mathcal T_\Pi}\Pi^B_t)\bigr]E[C(P)]≥E[∑t​(1t∈TH​​HtB​+1t∈TΠ​​ΠtB​)].
  5. Lemma 3.1. E[C(B)]=2∑t=1T−LE[Zt]E[\mathcal C(B)]=2\sum_{t=1}^{T-L}E[Z_t]E[C(B)]=2∑t=1T−L​E[Zt​].
  6. Lemma 3.4. This lemma characterises the crossing events Ast=[YstB<YstP]∩[Ys+1,tB≥Ys+1,tP]A_{st}=[Y^B_{st}<Y^P_{st}]\cap[Y^B_{s+1,t}\ge Y^P_{s+1,t}]Ast​=[YstB​<YstP​]∩[Ys+1,tB​≥Ys+1,tP​].
  7. Lemmas 3.5 and 3.6. Under independence, conditioning on t∈THt\in\mathcal T_Ht∈TH​ (respectively t∈TΠt\in\mathcal T_\Pit∈TΠ​) does not lower the conditional expected holding (respectively lost-sales) cost of BBB below ZtZ_tZt​.

Significance

The result. The theorem gives a constant-factor guarantee for a lost-sales system with lead times, for arbitrary independent and non-identical demand distributions. The policy is computed online, one period at a time, from one-dimensional conditional expectations, which an optimal policy cannot be. The guarantee holds with time-dependent holding costs and with non-increasing ordering and penalty costs. Section 5 of the paper extends it to correlated demand structures, which are out of this mission's scope.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved on paper and, to our knowledge, has no machine-checked proof. The mission produces the lost-sales dynamics, the truncated inventory position, marginal cost accounting and the sample-path amortization lemmas as reusable Lean objects. It also produces a formal treatment of the conditional-expectation step under independence, which the backlogging analysis does not need. The sibling mission on the backlogging model, LeviBalancing.DualBalancing, provides the shared instance and policy definitions that are reused here.

Difficulty

In the backlogging model, t∈THt\in\mathcal T_Ht∈TH​ is decided by information available at time ttt, so the cost comparison can be made period by period after conditioning on Ft\mathcal F_tFt​. With lost sales this fails: the truncated positions of BBB and of the benchmark can cross from below to above and back inside the window [t,t+L][t,t+L][t,t+L]. Whether t∈THt\in\mathcal T_Ht∈TH​ is therefore not known at time ttt, and conditioning on that event moves the conditional expectations of HtBH^B_tHtB​ and ΠtB\Pi^B_tΠtB​ away from ZtZ_tZt​. A newcomer's first idea, to reuse the backlogging argument with Ft\mathcal F_tFt​-measurable indicators, does not apply. The lost-sales penalty also cannot be charged period by period: Lemma 3.3 is a global amortization over intervals. The non-increasing penalties are what make that amortization possible when ptp_tpt​ varies.

Formalization scope

  • Periods are integers. The pipeline QjQ_jQj​, j≤0j\le0j≤0, is shared by every policy through the published order. Instance, cumDemand, order, DemandProcess and IsFeasiblePolicy are reused from LeviBalancing.DualBalancing. The new layer is one definition file, LostSalesBalancing.DualBalancing.Model.
  • Orders and demands are real (fractional orders, as in §3.1). The randomized integral-order variant is out of scope.
  • Cost generality is that of Theorem 3.1. Rates are only required to be ≥0\ge0≥0, which strengthens the paper's stationary h,p>0h,p>0h,p>0. Accordingly (11) is stated in lost units, and Lemma 3.4(iv) is stated as positive lost demand, not positive penalty.
  • Independence. The paper assumes independent demands but lets Fs\mathcal F_sFs​ hold more than past demands. The formalization requires Ft\mathcal F_tFt​ to be independent of (Dt,…,DT)(D_t,\dots,D_T)(Dt​,…,DT​) for every ttt, which for the natural filtration is exactly mutual independence. Finite means are integrability.
  • "OPT" becomes every feasible policy in Theorem 3.1, (14) and Lemmas 3.5–3.6. In the sample-path statements, (11) and Lemmas 3.2–3.4, it becomes every nonnegative order sequence.
  • Conditional events. Pr⁡(A∣F) E[X∣F,A]\Pr(A\mid\mathcal F)\,E[X\mid\mathcal F,A]Pr(A∣F)E[X∣F,A] is written E[1AX∣F]E[\mathbb 1_AX\mid\mathcal F]E[1A​X∣F], which never divides by a zero probability.
  • Expected costs are lower Lebesgue integrals in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]. The dual-balancing predicate requires HtBH^B_tHtB​ and ΠtB\Pi^B_tΠtB​ to be integrable, so no conditional expectation takes Mathlib's default value 000.
  • Lemma 3.4(iii) is stated with Ds≥IsP−ΔQsD_s\ge I^P_s-\Delta Q_sDs​≥IsP​−ΔQs​. The printed strict inequality excludes a tie at which the event AstA_{st}Ast​ does occur.
  • A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the dual-balancing predicate and the independence hypothesis are jointly satisfiable with T>LT>LT>L (checked locally on an explicit instance), and no statement is meaningful only when T≤LT\le LT≤L, the case in which every cost is zero.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the sample-path lemmas, which need only finite sums and the recursion; the conditional-expectation lemmas, which need a Harris-type argument for independent coordinates; and the existence of a measurable balancing order, which this mission does not pose.

Selected references

  • R. Levi, G. Janakiraman, M. Nagarajan, A 2-Approximation Algorithm for Stochastic Inventory Control Models with Lost Sales, Mathematics of Operations Research 33(2), 351–374, 2008. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.1070.0285
  • R. Levi, M. Pál, R. O. Roundy, D. B. Shmoys, Approximation Algorithms for Stochastic Inventory Control Models, Mathematics of Operations Research 32(2), 284–302, 2007. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.1060.0205
  • W. T. Huh, G. Janakiraman, J. A. Muckstadt, P. Rusmevichientong, Asymptotic Optimality of Order-Up-To Policies in Lost Sales Inventory Systems, Management Science, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.1080.0945
  • L. Xin, capped base-stock policies in lost-sales inventory models, Operations Research, 2021. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.2020.2019
  • L. Xin, Capped Base-Stock Policies: A 2.33-Approximation, SSRN working paper 7134538, 2026. https://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=7134538
12 thms2 active usersReviewed
CombinatoricsMarkov Chain·Captain: mikedeng1

Coalescents With Multiple Collisions 1: A Coalescent on Partitions of ℕ With k-Fold Merger Rates λ_{b,k} Exists Iff λ_{b,k} = ∫ x^{k−2}(1−x)^{b−k} Λ(dx)Research Paper

Motivation

A coalescent models a collection of ancestral lineages merging as time runs backward. If every event joins exactly two lineages, a single pairwise merger rate describes the finite system. Pitman’s 1999 paper asks which rates permit an event to join any number of blocks, while still giving one process on partitions of all positive integers. This matters when a sample of any finite size must be a restriction of the same population model: specifying a chain separately at every sample size is insufficient unless the chains agree when labels are removed. The paper supplies an exact answer in terms of a finite measure on the unit interval. See Pitman (1999), Theorem 1 and §3.1.

Setting

Let Pn\mathcal P_nPn​ be the partitions of [n]={1,…,n}[n]=\{1,\ldots,n\}[n]={1,…,n} and P∞\mathcal P_\inftyP∞​ the partitions of the positive integers. A partition records which labels belong to the same block. The map RnR_nRn​ restricts a partition to [n][n][n]. A partition π\piπ refines π′\pi'π′ when every block of π\piπ is contained in a block of π′\pi'π′. Thus blocks can merge as time grows, but never split.

A P∞\mathcal P_\inftyP∞​-valued process is a coalescent here when its paths refine with time and each finite restriction RnR_nRn​ has right-continuous step-function paths. For a partition of [n][n][n] with bbb blocks, each unordered choice of kkk blocks, 2≤k≤b2\le k\le b2≤k≤b, merges into one block at rate λb,k\lambda_{b,k}λb,k​. Different choices are different possible transitions, each with that rate; the rate is not multiplied by the number of choices. The finite chain’s generator QnQ_nQn​ records these transition rates, with each diagonal entry the negative sum of the other entries in its row. Its transition matrix after time ttt is exp⁡(tQn)\exp(tQ_n)exp(tQn​).

An array (λb,k)(\lambda_{b,k})(λb,k​) is consistent when, for every n<mn<mn<m and every initial partition of [m][m][m], restricting the mmm-label chain to [n][n][n] gives the same process law as the nnn-label chain started at the restricted partition. A finite nonnegative Borel measure Λ\LambdaΛ on [0,1][0,1][0,1] supplies a rate array through an integral. The point mass at zero is included: because 00=10^0=100=1 for natural powers, it gives pairwise mergers while higher-order merger rates vanish. These definitions follow Pitman (1999), pp. 1871–1872 and Lemma 18.

Formalization targets

Characterization of admissible rates

The goal is the existence-and-rates part of Theorem 1. For every nonnegative array (λb,k:2≤k≤b)(\lambda_{b,k}:2\le k\le b)(λb,k​:2≤k≤b), a coalescent with these finite-chain merger rates exists from every π∈P∞\pi\in\mathcal P_\inftyπ∈P∞​ if and only if there is a finite nonnegative measure Λ\LambdaΛ on [0,1][0,1][0,1] such that

λb,k=∫[0,1]xk−2(1−x)b−k Λ(dx)(2≤k≤b).\lambda_{b,k}=\int_{[0,1]}x^{k-2}(1-x)^{b-k}\,\Lambda(dx) \qquad(2\le k\le b).λb,k​=∫[0,1]​xk−2(1−x)b−kΛ(dx)(2≤k≤b).

The statement asks for one measure representing every rate in the infinite array, and a process from every initial partition. It fixes neither a particular measure nor a sample size. This is Theorem 1, equation (1).

Supporting claims

The milestone list follows §3.1: adjacent-size restrictions suffice to check consistency; consistency is equivalent to

λb,k=λb+1,k+λb+1,k+1(2≤k≤b);\lambda_{b,k}=\lambda_{b+1,k}+\lambda_{b+1,k+1} \qquad(2\le k\le b);λb,k​=λb+1,k​+λb+1,k+1​(2≤k≤b);

and the nonnegative normalized array relation

μi,j=μi+1,j+μi,j+1,μ0,0=1,\mu_{i,j}=\mu_{i+1,j}+\mu_{i,j+1},\qquad \mu_{0,0}=1,μi,j​=μi+1,j​+μi,j+1​,μ0,0​=1,

is equivalent to a representation μi,j=E[Xi(1−X)j]\mu_{i,j}=\mathbb E[X^i(1-X)^j]μi,j​=E[Xi(1−X)j] for X∈[0,1]X\in[0,1]X∈[0,1]. The final milestone states the uniqueness as well as the existence of the representing measure: equation (1) is a bijection between consistent arrays and finite measures. These are the claims in Lemma 18 and its proof, p. 1882.

Significance

The characterization turns an infinite family of nonnegative rates into one finite measure, and says exactly when finite chains at different sample sizes can be restrictions of a common partition process. The bijection also makes the measure identifiable from the rates. Without consistency, a chain specified at one size can change its law when an unobserved extra label is added; there would be no single process on P∞\mathcal P_\inftyP∞​ with those restrictions.

Pitman proved these results in 1999. The mission concerns machine-checking their statements and, eventually, their proofs. The current Lean items are open theorems with compiled statements; they do not yet have machine-checked proofs. The reusable part of a complete development would include finite partition generators, restriction of continuous-time Markov chains, and the moment representation for normalized nonnegative arrays. These tools also apply to other consistent families of random combinatorial structures.

Difficulty

Checking that each QnQ_nQn​ defines a finite-state chain does not by itself construct a process on partitions of all integers. Deleting one label can change which apparent merger occurs in the smaller chain, so the rates must satisfy a precise identity across adjacent sizes. Even once those identities hold, the conclusion requires one joint law whose finite restrictions agree for all sizes and times, with right-continuous paths. The representation step must recover a genuine finite measure, including possible mass at zero, and must prove uniqueness; a mere numerical fit for finitely many entries cannot establish the theorem.

Formalization scope

The Lean partition type is Setoid (Fin n) at finite size and a type synonym of Setoid ℕ at infinite size. The paper’s positive labels are shifted to zero-based labels, preserving their order. The measurable structure on infinite partitions is generated by pairwise equivalence coordinates, equivalently by finite restrictions; finite partition spaces use the discrete measurable structure. The process path predicate requires refinement at every pair of ordered times and right continuity of every finite restriction. Finite-chain laws are specified at all finite collections of times through exp⁡(tQn)\exp(tQ_n)exp(tQn​), so a process cannot qualify merely by having the right initial state or a single marginal.

The measure is represented on R\mathbb RR with zero mass outside [0,1]‘;integralsareover[0,1]`; integrals are over [0,1]‘;integralsareover[0,1].Finitenessisexplicit,preventinganonintegrableBochnerintegralfromacquiringLean’sdefaultvalue.Natural−numberexponentsretain. Finiteness is explicit, preventing a nonintegrable Bochner integral from acquiring Lean’s default value. Natural-number exponents retain .Finitenessisexplicit,preventinganonintegrableBochnerintegralfromacquiringLean’sdefaultvalue.Natural−numberexponentsretainx^0=1atatatx=0.Theratearrayisreadonlyfor. The rate array is read only for .Theratearrayisreadonlyfor2\le k\le b$, and the zero measure is allowed. The Fin 0 restriction is an additional tautological boundary case introduced by Lean’s natural numbers. The process sample space is a small Lean type, and the law is a probability measure on it.

Only the characterization sentence of Theorem 1 is targeted. Its later assertions about the strong Markov property, Feller semigroup, Skorohod path-space law, and weak continuity of the law map are outside this mission. Contributions toward those properties would need further path-space infrastructure. The formalized foundations and milestones can also support the paper’s Poisson construction and its later results, but those are separate targets.

Selected references

  • Jim Pitman, Coalescents with multiple collisions, Annals of Probability 27(4), 1870–1902, 1999. DOI: 10.1214/aop/1022874819.
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
Stochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

The Two-Parameter Poisson–Dirichlet Distribution Derived from a Stable Subordinator 2: Wendel's Formula E[exp(−λ/V_n)] = e^{−λ} φ_α(λ)^{n−1} ψ_α(λ)^{−n} for PD(α, 0)Research Paper

Motivation

A random discrete distribution is a random sequence of nonnegative numbers summing to 111. Ranked in decreasing order, V1≥V2≥⋯V_1\ge V_2\ge\cdotsV1​≥V2​≥⋯, such sequences model the relative sizes of species in a population, of cycles of a random permutation, of excursion intervals of a Markov process, and of atoms of random measures used as priors in Bayesian nonparametrics. The two-parameter Poisson–Dirichlet family PD(α,θ)\mathrm{PD}(\alpha,\theta)PD(α,θ) is the main family of such laws; Pitman and Yor (Ann. Probab. 1997) derived its properties from a stable subordinator.

The special case PD(α,0)\mathrm{PD}(\alpha,0)PD(α,0), 0<α<10<\alpha<10<α<1, describes the ranked lengths of the excursion intervals of a stable(α\alphaα) subordinator's range, or of a Bessel process away from zero, up to time 111. A basic question about it is the law of a single ranked term VnV_nVn​. The answer goes through the Laplace transform of 1/Vn1/V_n1/Vn​:

  • Darling (1952) found the characteristic function of the limit of Sn/X(n,1)S_n/X_{(n,1)}Sn​/X(n,1)​ (sum over maximum of i.i.d. heavy-tailed variables), which is that of 1/V11/V_11/V1​.
  • Lamperti (1961) derived the corresponding Laplace transform from renewal theory, for n=1n=1n=1.
  • Wendel (1964) obtained the transform for every n≥2n\ge2n≥2 from the range of a stable subordinator.
  • Pitman and Yor (1997), Proposition 11, explained the formula through an exact decomposition of 1/Vn1/V_n1/Vn​ into independent, infinitely divisible pieces.

Setting

Fix 0<α<10<\alpha<10<α<1. Let Y~1,Y~2,…\tilde Y_1,\tilde Y_2,\dotsY~1​,Y~2​,… be independent, with Y~n\tilde Y_nY~n​ having the beta distribution beta(1−α,nα)\mathrm{beta}(1-\alpha,n\alpha)beta(1−α,nα) on (0,1)(0,1)(0,1). Form the stick-breaking sequence V~1=Y~1\tilde V_1=\tilde Y_1V~1​=Y~1​ and V~n=(1−Y~1)⋯(1−Y~n−1)Y~n\tilde V_n=(1-\tilde Y_1)\cdots(1-\tilde Y_{n-1})\tilde Y_nV~n​=(1−Y~1​)⋯(1−Y~n−1​)Y~n​ for n≥2n\ge2n≥2, and let V1≥V2≥⋯V_1\ge V_2\ge\cdotsV1​≥V2​≥⋯ be its terms in decreasing order. The law of (Vn)(V_n)(Vn​) is PD(α,0)\mathrm{PD}(\alpha,0)PD(α,0) (Definition 1 of the paper, with θ=0\theta=0θ=0).

From (Vn)(V_n)(Vn​) define Rn=Vn+1/VnR_n=V_{n+1}/V_nRn​=Vn+1​/Vn​, A0=0A_0=0A0​=0 and, for n≥1n\ge1n≥1,

An=V1+⋯+VnVn+1,Σn=Vn+1+Vn+2+⋯Vn.A_n=\frac{V_1+\cdots+V_n}{V_{n+1}},\qquad \Sigma_n=\frac{V_{n+1}+V_{n+2}+\cdots}{V_n}.An​=Vn+1​V1​+⋯+Vn​​,Σn​=Vn​Vn+1​+Vn+2​+⋯​.

For λ≥0\lambda\ge0λ≥0 the paper's two Laplace exponents are

ϕα(λ)=α∫1∞e−λxx−α−1 dx,ψα(λ)=1+α∫01(1−e−λx)x−α−1 dx,\phi_\alpha(\lambda)=\alpha\int_1^\infty e^{-\lambda x}x^{-\alpha-1}\,dx,\qquad \psi_\alpha(\lambda)=1+\alpha\int_0^1\left(1-e^{-\lambda x}\right)x^{-\alpha-1}\,dx,ϕα​(λ)=α∫1∞​e−λxx−α−1dx,ψα​(λ)=1+α∫01​(1−e−λx)x−α−1dx,

and ψα(λ)=Γ(1−α)λα+ϕα(λ)\psi_\alpha(\lambda)=\Gamma(1-\alpha)\lambda^\alpha+\phi_\alpha(\lambda)ψα​(λ)=Γ(1−α)λα+ϕα​(λ).

The proof represents (Vn)(V_n)(Vn​) through a Poisson random measure (PRM) Λα\Lambda_\alphaΛα​ on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞) with Λα(x,∞)=Cx−α\Lambda_\alpha(x,\infty)=Cx^{-\alpha}Λα​(x,∞)=Cx−α: its ranked points Δ1>Δ2>⋯\Delta_1>\Delta_2>\cdotsΔ1​>Δ2​>⋯ satisfy Xn:=CΔn−α=ε1+⋯+εnX_n:=C\Delta_n^{-\alpha}=\varepsilon_1+\cdots+\varepsilon_nXn​:=CΔn−α​=ε1​+⋯+εn​ with εi\varepsilon_iεi​ i.i.d. standard exponential, and Vn=Δn/∑mΔmV_n=\Delta_n/\sum_m\Delta_mVn​=Δn​/∑m​Δm​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 11

For every n≥1n\ge1n≥1,

1Vn=1+An−1+Σna.s.,\frac1{V_n}=1+A_{n-1}+\Sigma_n\quad\text{a.s.},Vn​1​=1+An−1​+Σn​a.s.,

where (i) An−1A_{n-1}An−1​ is distributed as the sum of n−1n-1n−1 independent copies of A1A_1A1​, with E[e−λAn−1]=ϕα(λ)n−1E[e^{-\lambda A_{n-1}}]=\phi_\alpha(\lambda)^{n-1}E[e−λAn−1​]=ϕα​(λ)n−1; (ii) Σn\Sigma_nΣn​ is distributed as the sum of nnn independent copies of Σ1\Sigma_1Σ1​, with E[e−λΣn]=ψα(λ)−nE[e^{-\lambda\Sigma_n}]=\psi_\alpha(\lambda)^{-n}E[e−λΣn​]=ψα​(λ)−n; (iii) An−1A_{n-1}An−1​ and Σn\Sigma_nΣn​ are independent.

Milestones

  • Proposition 10 (iii): Xn=LVn−αX_n=LV_n^{-\alpha}Xn​=LVn−α​, with L=lim⁡nVnαL=\lim nV_n^\alphaL=limnVnα​, are the arrival times of a unit Poisson process, and Vn=Xn−1/α/∑mXm−1/αV_n=X_n^{-1/\alpha}/\sum_mX_m^{-1/\alpha}Vn​=Xn−1/α​/∑m​Xm−1/α​.
  • Lemma 24 (i)–(ii): CΔn−αC\Delta_n^{-\alpha}CΔn−α​ is gamma(n)(n)(n); the ratios Δi/Δn\Delta_i/\Delta_nΔi​/Δn​, i<ni<ni<n, are the order statistics of n−1n-1n−1 i.i.d. variables of density αx−α−1\alpha x^{-\alpha-1}αx−α−1 on (1,∞)(1,\infty)(1,∞), independent of (Δn,Δn+1,… )(\Delta_n,\Delta_{n+1},\dots)(Δn​,Δn+1​,…).
  • (66): P(A1∈dx)=αx−α−1dx 1(x>1)P(A_1\in dx)=\alpha x^{-\alpha-1}dx\,1(x>1)P(A1​∈dx)=αx−α−1dx1(x>1).
  • (67): E[e−λΣn∣Δ1,…,Δn]=exp⁡(−Δn−α∫01(1−e−λu)Λα(du))E[e^{-\lambda\Sigma_n}\mid\Delta_1,\dots,\Delta_n]=\exp\left(-\Delta_n^{-\alpha}\int_0^1(1-e^{-\lambda u})\Lambda_\alpha(du)\right)E[e−λΣn​∣Δ1​,…,Δn​]=exp(−Δn−α​∫01​(1−e−λu)Λα​(du)).
  • Proposition 8: the RnR_nRn​ are independent and Rn∼beta(nα,1)R_n\sim\mathrm{beta}(n\alpha,1)Rn​∼beta(nα,1).
  • (34): ψα(λ)=Γ(1−α)λα+ϕα(λ)\psi_\alpha(\lambda)=\Gamma(1-\alpha)\lambda^\alpha+\phi_\alpha(\lambda)ψα​(λ)=Γ(1−α)λα+ϕα​(λ).

Consequence: Corollary 12 (Wendel's formula)

E[exp⁡(−λ/Vn)]=e−λ ϕα(λ)n−1 ψα(λ)−n(λ≥0).E\left[\exp(-\lambda/V_n)\right]=e^{-\lambda}\,\phi_\alpha(\lambda)^{n-1}\,\psi_\alpha(\lambda)^{-n}\qquad(\lambda\ge0).E[exp(−λ/Vn​)]=e−λϕα​(λ)n−1ψα​(λ)−n(λ≥0).

Significance

The result. Proposition 11 turns 1/Vn1/V_n1/Vn​ into the sum of the constant 111 and two independent variables, each a sum of i.i.d. pieces with explicit Laplace exponents. Wendel's formula (38) is a one-line consequence, and since 1/Vn>01/V_n>01/Vn​>0 it determines the law of VnV_nVn​. The same decomposition is reused later in the paper: Proposition 26 combines (35) and (67) into a conditional form of (38) given R1,…,Rn−1R_1,\dots,R_{n-1}R1​,…,Rn−1​ and XnX_nXn​, which the paper uses in later calculations.

Formalizing it. All results here are proved in the paper; none is machine-checked. A formal proof needs the Poisson representation of PD(α,0)\mathrm{PD}(\alpha,0)PD(α,0) (Proposition 10, itself resting on Perman–Pitman–Yor 1992), elementary but non-trivial facts about Poisson arrival times (gamma laws, order statistics, independence of ratios), and a conditional Laplace functional of a Poisson process. Each milestone is a self-contained target; Lemma 24 and (67) are statements about Poisson arrival times only and do not mention Poisson–Dirichlet laws.

Difficulty

The identity 1/Vn=1+An−1+Σn1/V_n=1+A_{n-1}+\Sigma_n1/Vn​=1+An−1​+Σn​ is algebra once ∑mVm=1\sum_mV_m=1∑m​Vm​=1. The content is in the laws. On the stick-breaking side, the VnV_nVn​ are the order statistics of a dependent sequence, and neither An−1A_{n-1}An−1​ nor Σn\Sigma_nΣn​ has an evident structure: the ranking destroys the independence of the Y~n\tilde Y_nY~n​. The proof passes to the Poisson side, where the ranked points of a PRM have tractable conditional laws, and then must transport the conclusions back through a representation that holds only in distribution. Part (ii) requires a conditional computation (67) given nnn points, followed by integration against a gamma law; part (iii) requires the mutual independence of all the ratios RnR_nRn​, an infinite family.

Formalization scope

The Lean development lives in namespace PoissonDirichlet.Wendel; its definitions file contains every object above.

  • Sequences are 0-based: V ω k is Vk+1V_{k+1}Vk+1​, Aseq (V ω) k is AkA_kAk​, Sigseq (V ω) k is Σk+1\Sigma_{k+1}Σk+1​, ratio (V ω) k is Rk+1R_{k+1}Rk+1​. Exponents n−1n-1n−1 and nnn become k and k + 1.
  • PD(α,0)\mathrm{PD}(\alpha,0)PD(α,0) is Definition 1 with θ=0\theta=0θ=0. The law of (Y~n)(\tilde Y_n)(Y~n​) is a probability measure on sequences with independent coordinates of the stated beta laws. "VVV has law PD(α,0)\mathrm{PD}(\alpha,0)PD(α,0)" means P(V∈s)P(V\in s)P(V∈s) equals the mass of the preimage of sss under the ranked stick-breaking map, for every measurable sss. Ranked values are defined with the extended cardinal Set.encard.
  • AnA_nAn​ and Σn\Sigma_nΣn​ are the VVV-quotients of (31)–(32), not the RRR-expressions; ϕα,ψα\phi_\alpha,\psi_\alphaϕα​,ψα​ are the integrals (33)–(34), not Laplace transforms.
  • "Distributed as the sum of mmm independent copies of XXX" is equality with the mmm-fold convolution power of the law of XXX, the Dirac mass at 000 when m=0m=0m=0.
  • Every statement carries 0<α<10<\alpha<10<α<1 except Lemma 24, which holds for all α>0\alpha>0α>0.
  • The local time LLL of (24) is a random variable with the hypothesis that nVnα→LnV_n^\alpha\to LnVnα​→L almost surely; this is its definition.
  • The PRM is used only through its ranked points, encoded by arrival times: Δn=(C/Xn)1/α\Delta_n=(C/X_n)^{1/\alpha}Δn​=(C/Xn​)1/α with Xn=ε1+⋯+εnX_n=\varepsilon_1+\cdots+\varepsilon_nXn​=ε1​+⋯+εn​, εi\varepsilon_iεi​ i.i.d. standard exponential. This is the paper's own (27)–(28). In (67) the εi\varepsilon_iεi​ are also assumed measurable, so that the conditioning σ\sigmaσ-algebra is a sub-σ\sigmaσ-algebra.
  • Lemma 24 (iii) is not stated; its only use is (67), which is stated. Corollary 12 states only the formula (38).

The formalization does not use Measure.map of a possibly non-measurable map in any definition: every equality of laws for such maps is stated through preimages. It does not use Set.ncard or limUnder. Every Laplace transform is the integral of a function with values in (0,1](0,1](0,1], and both exponent integrals are integrable under the stated parameter range, so no statement holds because an integral takes the junk value 000.

Useful infrastructure beyond this mission: arrival times of a Poisson process and their gamma and order-statistic laws; convolution powers of measures on R\mathbb RR; the Laplace functional of a Poisson random measure. Contributions of any of these as standalone lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. Pitman and M. Yor, The two-parameter Poisson–Dirichlet distribution derived from a stable subordinator, Ann. Probab. 25(2):855–900, 1997. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1024404422
  • M. Perman, J. Pitman and M. Yor, Size-biased sampling of Poisson point processes and excursions, Probab. Theory Related Fields 92:21–39, 1992.
  • J. G. Wendel, Zero-free intervals of semi-stable Markov processes, Math. Scand. 14:21–34, 1964.
  • J. Lamperti, A contribution to renewal theory, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 12:724–731, 1961.
  • D. A. Darling, The influence of the maximum term in the addition of independent random variables, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 73:95–107, 1952.
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
Stochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

The Two-Parameter Poisson–Dirichlet Distribution Derived from a Stable Subordinator 1: Under PD(α, 0) the Ratios V_{n+1}/V_n Are Independent with beta(nα, 1) LawsResearch Paper

Motivation

Random partitions describe a population split into species, clusters, or types. If the species frequencies are put in decreasing order, the first frequency is the largest species, the second is the next largest, and so on. The Poisson–Dirichlet distribution gives a family of laws for these ranked frequencies. Its two parameters connect different random partition models, while the one-parameter case PD(α,0)\mathrm{PD}(\alpha,0)PD(α,0) has a particularly direct description through ratios of neighboring frequencies. Pitman and Yor state that these ratios are independent and have explicit beta distributions, even though the ranked frequencies themselves have a complicated joint law (Pitman and Yor 1997, Proposition 8).

The result matters when a statistic of a random partition depends on the relative sizes of its largest components. A ratio Vn+1/VnV_{n+1}/V_nVn+1​/Vn​ describes the gap between two successive ranked species without requiring their total scale. An independent sequence of such ratios also gives a way to generate the entire ranked sequence. The paper records this converse immediately after Proposition 8 as Corollary 9 (Pitman and Yor 1997, p. 862).

Setting

Fix 0<α<10<\alpha<10<α<1. A beta(a,b)(a,b)(a,b) distribution is a probability distribution on (0,1)(0,1)(0,1) with density proportional to xa−1(1−x)b−1x^{a-1}(1-x)^{b-1}xa−1(1−x)b−1. Let Y~n\widetilde Y_nYn​, for n=1,2,…n=1,2,\ldotsn=1,2,…, be independent beta(1−α,nα)(1-\alpha,n\alpha)(1−α,nα) random variables. They break an initial mass of one into successive stick lengths

V~n=Y~n∏i=1n−1(1−Y~i).\widetilde V_n=\widetilde Y_n\prod_{i=1}^{n-1}(1-\widetilde Y_i).Vn​=Yn​i=1∏n−1​(1−Yi​).

Sort these lengths in decreasing order, counting repeated values separately, and write the resulting sequence as V1≥V2≥⋯V_1\geq V_2\geq\cdotsV1​≥V2​≥⋯. The law of this ranked sequence is PD(α,0)\mathrm{PD}(\alpha,0)PD(α,0), the θ=0\theta=0θ=0 case of Definition 1 in the paper (Pitman and Yor 1997, p. 857). The paper's broader definition takes 0≤α<10\leq\alpha<10≤α<1 and θ>−α\theta>-\alphaθ>−α, with beta(1−α,θ+nα)(1-\alpha,\theta+n\alpha)(1−α,θ+nα) stick factors. This mission retains that general definition so later statements use the same object, but its theorems concern θ=0\theta=0θ=0 and 0<α<10<\alpha<10<α<1.

Define the adjacent ranked ratio Rn=Vn+1/VnR_n=V_{n+1}/V_nRn​=Vn+1​/Vn​. The source proves that the ranked masses are strictly positive almost surely under the Poisson–Dirichlet law, so these ratios have their ordinary probabilistic meaning (Pitman and Yor 1997, Proposition 2). The random sequence R1,R2,…R_1,R_2,\ldotsR1​,R2​,… is different from the independent stick factors Y~n\widetilde Y_nYn​: the latter are defined before ranking, whereas each RnR_nRn​ compares consecutive masses after ranking.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 8

For a sequence (Vn)(V_n)(Vn​) with PD(α,0)\mathrm{PD}(\alpha,0)PD(α,0) law, the variables Rn=Vn+1/VnR_n=V_{n+1}/V_nRn​=Vn+1​/Vn​ are mutually independent, and each has beta(nα,1)(n\alpha,1)(nα,1) distribution. The equivalent cumulative distribution formula is part of the target:

P(Rn≤r)=rnα(n≥1, 0≤r≤1).\mathbb P(R_n\leq r)=r^{n\alpha}\qquad(n\geq1,\ 0\leq r\leq1).P(Rn​≤r)=rnα(n≥1, 0≤r≤1).

The exponent and beta parameter use the paper's one-based nnn. Independence concerns the full infinite family, rather than only pairs of ratios (Pitman and Yor 1997, Proposition 8, equations (21)–(22)).

Supporting targets

Proposition 10(i) establishes a local-time limit L=lim⁡n→∞nVnαL=\lim_{n\to\infty}nV_n^\alphaL=limn→∞​nVnα​, both almost surely and in LpL^pLp for every real p≥1p\geq1p≥1. Proposition 10(iii) identifies the transformed sequence Xn=LVn−αX_n=LV_n^{-\alpha}Xn​=LVn−α​ with the arrival times of a unit-rate Poisson process: it has the joint law of partial sums of independent standard exponential variables. The proposition also recovers VnV_nVn​ by normalizing Xn−1/αX_n^{-1/\alpha}Xn−1/α​. Finally, the proof of Proposition 8 states that consecutive Poisson arrival ratios Xn/Xn+1X_n/X_{n+1}Xn​/Xn+1​ are independent beta(n,1)(n,1)(n,1) variables (Pitman and Yor 1997, pp. 862, 870). These are the three curated milestones. Corollary 9 is included as a companion: independent beta(nα,1)(n\alpha,1)(nα,1) ratios, inserted into the paper's convergent series and finite products, produce a PD(α,0)\mathrm{PD}(\alpha,0)PD(α,0) sequence.

Significance

Proposition 8 converts a statement about the order statistics of infinitely many dependent masses into an explicit product law for their ratios. It gives direct distributional information about every neighboring pair in a Poisson–Dirichlet partition. Together with Corollary 9, it specifies both how to read the ratios from a ranked partition and how to reconstruct a ranked partition from ratios. The formulas can therefore serve as a common interface for calculations and simulation involving PD(α,0)\mathrm{PD}(\alpha,0)PD(α,0) (Pitman and Yor 1997, Propositions 8–10).

The mathematical results in this mission were proved in the 1997 paper; the open work here is a machine-checked Lean proof of their stated forms. Such a development would add reusable facts about infinite beta sequences, ranked stick lengths, Poisson arrival times, and their joint laws. The independent-arrival-ratio statement is useful beyond the Poisson–Dirichlet setting because its assumptions only concern standard exponential increments.

Difficulty

The stick factors are independent before their lengths are sorted, but sorting is a global operation: a particular ranked mass may have come from any stick index. Their independence therefore does not directly give independence of adjacent ranked ratios. Even a marginal calculation for one ratio does not establish mutual independence of the entire sequence. The local-time and arrival-time assertions in Proposition 10 encode the extra structure needed to state the joint result. The real technical burden is to relate the distribution obtained from ranked stick lengths to the distribution of an infinite Poisson arrival sequence, while retaining the almost-sure limits and normalization stated by the authors.

Formalization scope

Lean represents every sequence as a function N→R\mathbb N\to\mathbb RN→R, with index k=0k=0k=0 denoting the paper's first index n=1n=1n=1. stick implements equation (4); ranked defines the (k+1)(k+1)(k+1)-st largest nonnegative length by upper-level-set cardinality, counted with multiplicity. It uses extended cardinality so an infinite upper-level set cannot be assigned cardinality zero. IsStickLaw records independence and the beta(1−α,θ+(k+1)α)(1-\alpha,\theta+(k+1)\alpha)(1−α,θ+(k+1)α) coordinate laws. HasPD describes the distribution of the ranked stick sequence by probabilities of measurable preimages. This commits the mission to Definition 1 rather than a ratio construction of PD(α,0)\mathrm{PD}(\alpha,0)PD(α,0).

All mission theorems require 0<α<10<\alpha<10<α<1, and every source probability space is a probability measure. Ratios and negative real powers occur only as random quantities whose bases are positive almost surely under that law. Their exceptional values on null sets do not affect the distributional claims. The local time is identified by its almost-sure defining limit, rather than by a default value assigned when a limit fails. The LpL^pLp clause uses the norm of the approximation error. The Poisson arrival law is stated jointly on measurable sets of infinite real sequences; it is not reduced to one-dimensional exponential marginals. These choices rule out vacuous interpretations through a nonmeasurable Measure.map, a finite-cardinality default on an infinite set, a junk integral, limUnder at a nonexistent limit, or a dropped parameter range.

The development needs Mathlib's beta and exponential measures, infinite product and independence APIs, measurable sequence spaces, real powers, infinite sums, and LpL^pLp norms. Results about ranked values and arrival ratios would be reusable in later Poisson–Dirichlet missions. Contributions that establish these source statements at full strength, or their necessary measurable and summability infrastructure, fit the scope.

Selected references

  • J. Pitman and M. Yor, The two-parameter Poisson–Dirichlet distribution derived from a stable subordinator, Annals of Probability 25(2):855–900, 1997. DOI: 10.1214/aop/1024404422.
5 thms2 active usersReviewed
Machine LearningOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Nonparametric Asymptotic Analysis of Inventory Planning with Censored Demand 2: Without a Bound on y^NV, Expanding-Projection AIM Has Regret ≤ max{b,h}(T^{δ−1/2} + T^{−1/2} + (y^NV)^{1+2/δ}/T)Research Paper

Motivation

A retailer who restocks a product every period must pick an order-up-to level without knowing the demand distribution. When a period ends with an empty shelf, the retailer records only its sales, so the true demand above the stock level is censored. The classical newsvendor solution, the critical fractile of the demand distribution, cannot be computed. Huh and Rusmevichientong (Math. Oper. Res., 2009) treat this as an online convex optimization problem: the expected one-period cost is convex in the stock level, and its derivative can be estimated without bias from the censored observation alone. Their Adaptive Inventory Management (AIM) algorithm is a projected stochastic subgradient method in the style of Zinkevich (2003) and Flaxman, Kalai and McMahan (2005). Its average expected cost converges to the newsvendor cost at rate O(1/T)O(1/\sqrt T)O(1/T​).

That analysis assumes that the manager knows an upper bound yˉ\bar yyˉ​ on the newsvendor quantity, and the algorithm projects onto [0,yˉ][0,\bar y][0,yˉ​]. This mission formalizes §3.1 of the paper, which removes the assumption. The projection interval grows with time, and the regret bound is explicit in the unknown newsvendor quantity. Earlier adaptive schemes for censored newsvendor problems include Godfrey and Powell (2001) and Burnetas and Smith (2000).

Setting

Periods are t=1,2,…t = 1, 2, \dotst=1,2,…. Demands D1,D2,…D_1, D_2, \dotsD1​,D2​,… are i.i.d. copies of a nonnegative random variable DDD with finite mean and distribution function FFF. Inventory is perishable: every period starts empty, so the stock level is exactly the order-up-to level. With holding cost h>0h > 0h>0 per unit left over and shortage cost b>0b > 0b>0 per unit of unmet demand, the expected one-period cost at level y≥0y \ge 0y≥0 is

Q(y)=h E[y−D]++b E[D−y]+.Q(y) = h\,E[y-D]^+ + b\,E[D-y]^+ .Q(y)=hE[y−D]++bE[D−y]+.

The newsvendor quantity is yNV=inf⁡{y≥0:F(y)≥b/(b+h)}y^{NV} = \inf\{y \ge 0 : F(y) \ge b/(b+h)\}yNV=inf{y≥0:F(y)≥b/(b+h)}, the minimizer of QQQ.

Write Bˉ=max⁡{b,h}\bar B = \max\{b,h\}Bˉ=max{b,h} and P[0,a](z)=max⁡{min⁡{z,a},0}P_{[0,a]}(z) = \max\{\min\{z,a\},0\}P[0,a]​(z)=max{min{z,a},0}. After period ttt, the manager observes whether demand fell short of the stock level and forms the signal

Ht(y)={h,Dt<y,−b,Dt≥y.H_t(y) = \begin{cases} h, & D_t < y,\\ -b, & D_t \ge y.\end{cases}Ht​(y)={h,−b,​Dt​<y,Dt​≥y.​

Fix δ∈(0,1/2)\delta \in (0, 1/2)δ∈(0,1/2). The modified AIM algorithm starts from a level y^1δ∈[0,1]\hat y^\delta_1 \in [0,1]y^​1δ​∈[0,1] and updates

y^t+1δ=P[0, tδ/2] ⁣(y^tδ−ϵtHt(y^tδ)),ϵt=1Bˉt.\hat y^\delta_{t+1} = P_{[0,\,t^{\delta/2}]}\!\left(\hat y^\delta_t - \epsilon_t H_t(\hat y^\delta_t)\right), \qquad \epsilon_t = \frac{1}{\bar B\sqrt t}.y^​t+1δ​=P[0,tδ/2]​(y^​tδ​−ϵt​Ht​(y^​tδ​)),ϵt​=Bˉt​1​.

Neither the step size nor the projection interval uses any bound on yNVy^{NV}yNV. The level y^tδ\hat y^\delta_ty^​tδ​ depends only on D1,…,Dt−1D_1, \dots, D_{t-1}D1​,…,Dt−1​, and only through the censored observations.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 7 (p. 11)

For every δ∈(0,1/2)\delta \in (0, 1/2)δ∈(0,1/2) and every T≥1T \ge 1T≥1,

E[1T∑t=1TQ(y^tδ)]−Q(yNV)≤max⁡{b,h}[1T0.5−δ+1T0.5+(yNV)1+2/δT].E\left[\frac1T\sum_{t=1}^T Q(\hat y^\delta_t)\right] - Q(y^{NV}) \le \max\{b,h\}\left[\frac{1}{T^{0.5-\delta}} + \frac{1}{T^{0.5}} + \frac{(y^{NV})^{1+2/\delta}}{T}\right].E[T1​t=1∑T​Q(y^​tδ​)]−Q(yNV)≤max{b,h}[T0.5−δ1​+T0.51​+T(yNV)1+2/δ​].

The bound holds uniformly over all demand laws with finite mean. The price of not knowing yˉ\bar yyˉ​ is the slower rate Tδ−1/2T^{\delta - 1/2}Tδ−1/2 and a transient term in which yNVy^{NV}yNV enters polynomially.

Milestones (proof of Theorem 7, p. 12)

  1. One-step inequality, the instance of Eq. (15) (Appendix A, p. 16) used in the proof. For each ttt with yNV≤tδ/2y^{NV} \le t^{\delta/2}yNV≤tδ/2,
E[Q(y^tδ)−Q(yNV)]≤E∣y^tδ−yNV∣22ϵt−E∣y^t+1δ−yNV∣22ϵt+ϵt2E∣Ht(y^tδ)∣2.E[Q(\hat y^\delta_t) - Q(y^{NV})] \le \frac{E|\hat y^\delta_t - y^{NV}|^2}{2\epsilon_t} - \frac{E|\hat y^\delta_{t+1} - y^{NV}|^2}{2\epsilon_t} + \frac{\epsilon_t}{2} E|H_t(\hat y^\delta_t)|^2 .E[Q(y^​tδ​)−Q(yNV)]≤2ϵt​E∣y^​tδ​−yNV∣2​−2ϵt​E∣y^​t+1δ​−yNV∣2​+2ϵt​​E∣Ht​(y^​tδ​)∣2.
  1. Eq. (10): early rounds, where the projection interval has not yet reached yNVy^{NV}yNV:
E[∑1≤t≤T, t<(yNV)2/δ{Q(y^tδ)−Q(yNV)}]≤Bˉ (yNV)1+2/δ.E\Big[\sum_{1 \le t \le T,\ t < (y^{NV})^{2/\delta}} \{Q(\hat y^\delta_t) - Q(y^{NV})\}\Big] \le \bar B\,(y^{NV})^{1+2/\delta}.E[1≤t≤T, t<(yNV)2/δ∑​{Q(y^​tδ​)−Q(yNV)}]≤Bˉ(yNV)1+2/δ.
  1. Eq. (11): late rounds:
E[∑1≤t≤T, t≥(yNV)2/δ{Q(y^tδ)−Q(yNV)}]≤Bˉ T0.5+δ+Bˉ T0.5.E\Big[\sum_{1 \le t \le T,\ t \ge (y^{NV})^{2/\delta}} \{Q(\hat y^\delta_t) - Q(y^{NV})\}\Big] \le \bar B\, T^{0.5+\delta} + \bar B\, T^{0.5}.E[1≤t≤T, t≥(yNV)2/δ∑​{Q(y^​tδ​)−Q(yNV)}]≤BˉT0.5+δ+BˉT0.5.

Significance

The result. Theorem 7 shows that a distribution-free, censored-data policy can be asymptotically optimal without any prior bound on the optimal stock level. The only inputs are bbb, hhh and the tuning parameter δ\deltaδ. The explicit constant separates two effects. A transient cost grows with yNVy^{NV}yNV and vanishes like 1/T1/T1/T. A steady-state rate Tδ−1/2T^{\delta-1/2}Tδ−1/2 approaches the known-bound rate T−1/2T^{-1/2}T−1/2 as δ→0\delta \to 0δ→0, at the cost of a larger transient. The expanding-projection device applies to other stochastic subgradient methods whose feasible region is unbounded.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper, but as far as is known it has no machine-checked proof. The mission produces the modified algorithm as an explicit function of the demand path, the per-step stochastic gradient inequality with a time-varying projection, and the two-phase regret decomposition. The per-step inequality with a varying domain is reusable for other growing-domain online methods.

Difficulty

The standard projected-gradient analysis compares every iterate with a fixed minimizer in a fixed compact set, and it bounds the telescoping distance terms by the diameter of that set. Neither applies here. In the early rounds the projection interval does not contain yNVy^{NV}yNV, so the distance to yNVy^{NV}yNV can grow from step to step. Once the interval contains yNVy^{NV}yNV, the diameter that controls the telescoping sum grows with ttt. The step sizes and the growing radii must be traded against each other through Abel summation. The bound on E[Ht(y^tδ)(y^tδ−yNV)]E[H_t(\hat y^\delta_t)(\hat y^\delta_t - y^{NV})]E[Ht​(y^​tδ​)(y^​tδ​−yNV)] needs the conditional-expectation argument that HtH_tHt​ is an unbiased subgradient of QQQ at a random point independent of DtD_tDt​. Applying the known-bound theorem with yˉ\bar yyˉ​ replaced by Tδ/2T^{\delta/2}Tδ/2 does not work, because the algorithm is not given TTT and the projection radius changes at every step.

Formalization scope

  • Demand: CappedBaseStock.DemandLaw (a probability law on R≥0\mathbb R_{\ge 0}R≥0​ with finite and strictly positive mean) and the i.i.d. path demandPathLaw (Measure.infinitePi), from the published definition CappedBaseStock_Model. The path is zero-based: the paper's DtD_tDt​ is coordinate t−1t-1t−1. The positive-mean field is not needed by Theorem 7. It excludes only D=0D = 0D=0 almost surely.
  • QQQ and yNVy^{NV}yNV: backorderCost and newsvendorLevel from the published definition LostSalesOrderUpTo.Asymptotic.Backorder. Real levels are passed through Real.toNNReal, and the levels involved are always nonnegative.
  • The algorithm modAimTarget δ b h ŷ₁ d t is a deterministic recursion on the demand path, and expectations are Bochner integrals over the path measure. All integrands are bounded and measurable, so no non-integrability default enters.
  • Explicit readings of the paper's loose phrases:
    • the first level, which the paper leaves unspecified, is assumed to satisfy y^1δ∈[0,1]\hat y^\delta_1 \in [0,1]y^​1δ​∈[0,1]; the theorem fails without it;
    • 0<b0 < b0<b and 0<h0 < h0<h are assumed;
    • the sums in (10) and (11) are restricted to 1≤t≤T1 \le t \le T1≤t≤T;
    • when yNV=0y^{NV} = 0yNV=0, the sum in (11) starts at t=1t = 1t=1;
    • all powers are real powers, with 0p=00^p = 00p=0 for p>0p > 0p>0;
    • "the manager does not know any upper bound" is not a hypothesis, because the algorithm uses none.
  • Trivializing formalizations are ruled out. The statements concern the algorithm's own iterates, not an arbitrary sequence of levels. The constants are the printed ones. The hypotheses are satisfiable, for example with y^1δ=0\hat y^\delta_1 = 0y^​1δ​=0.
  • Useful contributions:
    • convexity and Lipschitz continuity of QQQ with constant max⁡{b,h}\max\{b,h\}max{b,h};
    • the subgradient identity E[Ht(y)]=(b+h)F(y−)−bE[H_t(y)] = (b+h)F(y^-) - bE[Ht​(y)]=(b+h)F(y−)−b;
    • measurability and boundedness of the iterates;
    • independence of DtD_tDt​ from y^tδ\hat y^\delta_ty^​tδ​ under the product measure;
    • the projected-step inequality.

Selected references

  • W. T. Huh and P. Rusmevichientong, A Nonparametric Asymptotic Analysis of Inventory Planning with Censored Demand, Mathematics of Operations Research 34(1), 2009. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.1080.0355
  • M. Zinkevich, Online Convex Programming and Generalized Infinitesimal Gradient Ascent, ICML 2003. https://www.aaai.org/Papers/ICML/2003/ICML03-120.pdf
  • A. D. Flaxman, A. T. Kalai and H. B. McMahan, Online Convex Optimization in the Bandit Setting: Gradient Descent without a Gradient, SODA 2005. https://arxiv.org/abs/cs/0408007
  • G. A. Godfrey and W. B. Powell, An Adaptive, Distribution-Free Algorithm for the Newsvendor Problem with Censored Demands, Management Science 47(8), 2001. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.47.8.1101.10231
  • A. N. Burnetas and C. E. Smith, Adaptive Ordering and Pricing for Perishable Products, Operations Research 48(3), 2000. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.48.3.436.12437
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Shock Models and Wear Processes II: If the Probabilities of Surviving k Shocks Have Decreasing Successive Ratios, the Poisson Shock Life Distribution Is IHRResearch Paper

Motivation

A component may be exposed to shocks that arrive at random times. Its chance of lasting for a given time depends both on how often shocks arrive and on how likely it is to survive successive shocks. Reliability calculations often begin with the latter, discrete sequence, while replacement and life-testing questions concern the resulting lifetime distribution. Esary, Marshall, and Proschan study how a property imposed on the shock sequence appears in the continuous lifetime law. Their Theorem 3.1 gives several such inheritance results; this mission targets its increasing-hazard-rate assertion (Esary, Marshall, and Proschan 1973, Theorem 3.1).

An increasing hazard rate (IHR) means that the remaining life of a component that has survived to age ttt becomes stochastically shorter as ttt increases. This is a concrete way to express wear-out. The paper treats “increasing” as weakly increasing throughout, so a constant hazard rate is included (Esary, Marshall, and Proschan 1973, pp. 628, 631).

Setting

Shocks arrive according to a homogeneous Poisson process with rate λ>0\lambda>0λ>0. Let Pˉk\bar P_kPˉk​ be the probability that the component survives the first kkk shocks. The sequence starts at k=0k=0k=0 and satisfies 1=Pˉ0≥Pˉ1≥⋯≥01=\bar P_0\geq\bar P_1\geq\cdots\geq01=Pˉ0​≥Pˉ1​≥⋯≥0 for the target theorem. The probability of failure on the (k+1)(k+1)(k+1)st shock is pk+1=Pˉk−Pˉk+1p_{k+1}=\bar P_k-\bar P_{k+1}pk+1​=Pˉk​−Pˉk+1​. At a nonnegative time ttt, the chance of exactly kkk shock arrivals is wk(t)=e−λt(λt)k/k!w_k(t)=e^{-\lambda t}(\lambda t)^k/k!wk​(t)=e−λt(λt)k/k!. The survival function of the component is therefore the Poisson mixture

Hˉ(t)=∑k=0∞Pˉkwk(t),t≥0,\bar H(t)=\sum_{k=0}^{\infty}\bar P_k w_k(t),\qquad t\geq0,Hˉ(t)=k=0∑∞​Pˉk​wk​(t),t≥0,

and the paper sets Hˉ(t)=1\bar H(t)=1Hˉ(t)=1 for t<0t<0t<0. At positive times its density is h(t)=λ∑k≥0pk+1wk(t)h(t)=\lambda\sum_{k\geq0}p_{k+1}w_k(t)h(t)=λ∑k≥0​pk+1​wk​(t). The failure-on-shock sequence and the positive-time density are both part of the mission because the paper compares their shape as well (Esary, Marshall, and Proschan 1973, (2.1)–(2.3)).

A nonnegative sequence is PF₂ here when its successive ratios decrease weakly, wherever those ratios are defined. For the survival probabilities this says θk=Pˉk/Pˉk−1\theta_k=\bar P_k/\bar P_{k-1}θk​=Pˉk​/Pˉk−1​ decreases with k≥1k\geq1k≥1. A survival function is IHR when, for each x>0x>0x>0, the survival ratio Hˉ(t+x)/Hˉ(t)\bar H(t+x)/\bar H(t)Hˉ(t+x)/Hˉ(t) decreases with age ttt wherever it is defined. These are the discrete and continuous conditions connected by the target (Esary, Marshall, and Proschan 1973, Definition 2.3 and p. 631).

Formalization targets

Increasing hazard rate from PF₂ shock survival

The goal is Theorem 3.1(3.2):

(Pˉk)k≥0 is PF2⟹Hˉ is IHR.(\bar P_k)_{k\geq0}\text{ is PF}_2 \quad\Longrightarrow\quad \bar H\text{ is IHR}.(Pˉk​)k≥0​ is PF2​⟹Hˉ is IHR.

It covers any nonnegative, weakly decreasing shock-survival sequence with Pˉ0=1\bar P_0=1Pˉ0​=1 and a positive Poisson rate. It does not fix a finite number of shocks or a special survival law (Esary, Marshall, and Proschan 1973, p. 632).

Density and hazard estimates

The milestone list includes the positive-time density formula (2.3), the upper bound h(t)/Hˉ(t)≤λh(t)/\bar H(t)\leq\lambdah(t)/Hˉ(t)≤λ in (2.5), the derivative estimate h′(t)≥−λh(t)h'(t)\geq-\lambda h(t)h′(t)≥−λh(t) from the proof of (3.1), and that proof's sign-change claim for h(t)−ce−θth(t)-ce^{-\theta t}h(t)−ce−θt. It culminates in Theorem 3.1(3.1), which says that PF₂ failure-on-shock probabilities give a PF₂ positive-time density. These are statements made explicitly by the authors and form the neighboring shape result and the estimates cited in the proof of the IHR goal (Esary, Marshall, and Proschan 1973, pp. 628–629, 632–633).

Further results of the paper

The mission also poses, outside the milestone list, the other inheritance results of the same section and of §6 whose formulation uses the same objects:

∑j≥kPˉj/Pˉk decreasing ⇒ H DMRL(3.3),Pˉk∑j≥0Pˉj≥∑j≥kPˉj ⇒ H NBUE(3.6),Pˉk/Pˉk−1 increasing ⇒ H DHR(Theorem 3.2 (3.8)),Sk≥0 ⇒ Hˉ IHR(Theorem 3.3),\begin{aligned} &\textstyle\sum_{j\ge k}\bar P_j/\bar P_k\ \text{decreasing}\ \Rightarrow\ H\ \text{DMRL}\quad(3.3),\qquad \bar P_k\sum_{j\ge0}\bar P_j\ge\sum_{j\ge k}\bar P_j\ \Rightarrow\ H\ \text{NBUE}\quad(3.6),\\ &\bar P_k/\bar P_{k-1}\ \text{increasing}\ \Rightarrow\ H\ \text{DHR}\quad\text{(Theorem 3.2 (3.8))},\qquad S_k\ge0\ \Rightarrow\ \bar H\ \text{IHR}\quad\text{(Theorem 3.3)}, \end{aligned}​∑j≥k​Pˉj​/Pˉk​ decreasing ⇒ H DMRL(3.3),Pˉk​∑j≥0​Pˉj​≥∑j≥k​Pˉj​ ⇒ H NBUE(3.6),Pˉk​/Pˉk−1​ increasing ⇒ H DHR(Theorem 3.2 (3.8)),Sk​≥0 ⇒ Hˉ IHR(Theorem 3.3),​

where Sk=∑j=0k(kj)[Pˉj+1Pˉk−j+1−PˉjPˉk−j+2]S_k=\sum_{j=0}^k\binom kj[\bar P_{j+1}\bar P_{k-j+1}-\bar P_j\bar P_{k-j+2}]Sk​=∑j=0k​(jk​)[Pˉj+1​Pˉk−j+1​−Pˉj​Pˉk−j+2​] is the condition of Murthy and Lientz, strictly weaker than PF₂. Theorem 6.1 specializes to independent shock magnitudes, Pˉk=∏i=1kFi(x)\bar P_k=\prod_{i=1}^kF_i(x)Pˉk​=∏i=1k​Fi​(x) (exponential, IHR or DHR as Fi(x)F_i(x)Fi​(x) is constant, decreasing or increasing in iii), and Theorem 6.2 shows that a random threshold, Pˉk=∫0∞[F(x)]k dG(x)\bar P_k=\int_0^\infty[F(x)]^k\,dG(x)Pˉk​=∫0∞​[F(x)]kdG(x), always gives a logarithmically convex density on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞) (Esary, Marshall, and Proschan 1973, pp. 632, 634, 647).

Significance

The target makes a discrete reliability assumption useful for continuous-time decisions. One may model or estimate the sequence Pˉk\bar P_kPˉk​ from how the component responds to successive shocks and then infer an ageing property of its lifetime under Poisson arrivals. The conclusion is about residual lifetime at every age, not just its mean or one tail probability. The companion PF₂-density statement shows that the same transfer applies to failure-on-shock probabilities and the resulting continuous density (Esary, Marshall, and Proschan 1973, Theorem 3.1).

The 1973 results are proved in the paper. In this mission the Lean statements compile as open theorems; their mathematical proofs are still to be formalized. A completed development would make the Poisson-series model, its density, and the discrete-to-continuous shape claims reusable in later formalizations of shock and wear models. The other missions in this paper's series consider cumulative damage, first passage under wear, and random thresholds using related ideas.

Difficulty

The survival function mixes infinitely many shock counts. Each count has its own time-dependent Poisson weight, so a decreasing ratio of adjacent Pˉk\bar P_kPˉk​ terms does not give the desired comparison of survival ratios by a termwise inequality. The paper invokes a variation-diminishing property of a totally positive Poisson kernel for the corresponding shape arguments (Esary, Marshall, and Proschan 1973, p. 633). A formal proof must also justify differentiation and rearrangement of the infinite series, including sequences that reach zero after finitely many shocks.

Formalization scope

The Lean model uses real-valued functions for Pˉk\bar P_kPˉk​, Hˉ\bar HHˉ, and hhh, with the shock count indexed from zero. The Poisson mixture is the definition of Hˉ\bar HHˉ; no random lifetime is introduced in place of it. The value Hˉ(t)=1\bar H(t)=1Hˉ(t)=1 for negative time follows (2.1). IHR is expressed for all real ages s≤ts\leq ts≤t by cross-multiplying the survival-ratio comparison. With Pˉ0=1\bar P_0=1Pˉ0​=1, this includes the boundary at zero without an atom there. PF₂ sequence and density conditions are also cross-multiplied. This gives the paper's ratio statements wherever denominators are positive and retains the natural zero-survival cases without using real division by zero.

The source treats Pˉk\bar P_kPˉk​ as probabilities, takes λ>0\lambda>0λ>0, and restricts variables to avoid zero denominators; Lean states the rate, nonnegativity, weak monotonicity, and the ratio convention explicitly. Formula (2.3) is represented by the derivative identity Hˉ′=−h\bar H'=-hHˉ′=−h at positive time. The bound (2.5) is h≤λHˉh\leq\lambda\bar Hh≤λHˉ, equivalent to the hazard-rate statement wherever survival is positive. The sign-change milestone excludes a strict positive–negative–positive pattern at increasing positive times, matching the authors' “at most two, in the order negative, positive, negative” wording. These conventions prevent an empty IHR statement or a trivial result caused by totalized division.

A complete proof needs reusable facts about convergence and differentiation of Poisson-weighted series and about preservation of sign patterns under the Poisson kernel. Contributions to that infrastructure, the density and hazard estimates, and the PF₂ transfer are in scope, as are the further results above. For those, the reversed classes are stated on the life-distribution domain: DHR compares ages 0≤s≤t0\le s\le t0≤s≤t only, because Theorem 3.2 allows Pˉ0<1\bar P_0<1Pˉ0​<1, an atom at the origin; a logarithmically convex density is the reversed cross-multiplied PF₂ inequality for hhh on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞). Mean residual lives and mean lives are computed in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞] (they are infinite when ∑kPˉk=∞\sum_k\bar P_k=\infty∑k​Pˉk​=∞), and their ratios are taken only where Hˉ(t)>0\bar H(t)>0Hˉ(t)>0. In Theorem 6.1 only the numbers Fi(x)∈[0,1]F_i(x)\in[0,1]Fi​(x)∈[0,1] enter, and "exponential" includes the rate 000; in Theorem 6.2 the shock and threshold laws are probability measures on R\mathbb RR with no mass on (−∞,0)(-\infty,0)(−∞,0). The paper's further remark that a survival function needs Pˉk→0\bar P_k\to0Pˉk​→0 is not imposed: none of the theorems uses it.

Selected references

  • J. D. Esary, A. W. Marshall, and F. Proschan, Shock Models and Wear Processes, The Annals of Probability 1(4), 627–649, 1973. DOI: 10.1214/aop/1176996891.
  • S. Karlin, Total Positivity, Vol. I, Stanford University Press, 1968 (the variation-diminishing property cited on p. 633 of the paper).
  • R. E. Barlow and F. Proschan, Mathematical Theory of Reliability, Wiley, 1965 (IHR and DHR distributions in reliability).
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
Dynamical SystemsOperations ResearchRandom Matrix Theory·Captain: mikedeng1

Subadditive Ergodic Theory 5: For a Stationary Sequence in a Banach Algebra with E(log‖Y₁‖)⁺ < ∞, n⁻¹ log‖Y₁⋯Y_n‖ Converges in [−∞, ∞)Research Paper

Motivation

Products of random linear operators appear wherever a system evolves by repeated application of randomly chosen linear maps: linear recursions with random coefficients, products of random matrices in statistical physics, the growth of random dynamical systems, and population models in random environments. The basic question is the exponential growth rate of the product Y1Y2⋯YnY_1Y_2\cdots Y_nY1​Y2​⋯Yn​. For square matrices, Furstenberg and Kesten (Ann. Math. Statist. 31, 1960) proved that n−1log⁡∥Y1⋯Yn∥n^{-1}\log\|Y_1\cdots Y_n\|n−1log∥Y1​⋯Yn​∥ converges for stationary sequences with a logarithmic moment condition.

Kingman (Subadditive ergodic theory, Ann. Probab. 1(6):883–899, 1973) showed that this limit theorem is an instance of the subadditive ergodic theorem, and that the instance needs nothing of matrices beyond the norm inequality ∥AB∥≤∥A∥ ∥B∥\|AB\|\le\|A\|\,\|B\|∥AB∥≤∥A∥∥B∥. His Theorem 6 therefore holds in an arbitrary real or complex Banach algebra, including infinite-dimensional ones such as infinite matrices with finite ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ norm. It is the source of what later became known as the top Lyapunov exponent of a stationary random operator product.

Setting

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space. A two-parameter family is a collection x=(xst)x=(x_{st})x=(xst​) of random variables indexed by nonnegative integers s<ts<ts<t. Kingman's conditions (§1.1–1.2) are:

  • S₁: xsu≤xst+xtux_{su}\le x_{st}+x_{tu}xsu​≤xst​+xtu​ whenever s<t<us<t<us<t<u;
  • S₂: the joint distributions of (xs+1,t+1)(x_{s+1,t+1})(xs+1,t+1​) are the same as those of (xst)(x_{st})(xst​);
  • S₃: gt=E(x0t)g_t=E(x_{0t})gt​=E(x0t​) is finite for every t≥1t\ge1t≥1 and gt≥−Atg_t\ge -Atgt​≥−At for some constant AAA;
  • S₃′: E(x01+)<∞E(x_{01}^+)<\inftyE(x01+​)<∞, where x+=max⁡(x,0)x^+=\max(x,0)x+=max(x,0).

A family of real random variables satisfying S₁, S₂ and S₃ is a subadditive process. Kingman's Theorem 1 (the goal of the first mission of this series) says that for a subadditive process x0t/tx_{0t}/tx0t​/t converges almost surely and in mean to a finite random variable ξ\xiξ with E(ξ)=γ=inf⁡t≥1gt/tE(\xi)=\gamma=\inf_{t\ge1}g_t/tE(ξ)=γ=inft≥1​gt​/t.

A Banach algebra B\mathfrak BB is a complete normed algebra over R\mathbb RR or C\mathbb CC whose norm satisfies ∥AB∥≤∥A∥ ∥B∥\|AB\|\le\|A\|\,\|B\|∥AB∥≤∥A∥∥B∥. A sequence (Yn)n≥1(Y_n)_{n\ge1}(Yn​)n≥1​ of B\mathfrak BB-valued random elements is stationary if (Yn+1)n≥1(Y_{n+1})_{n\ge1}(Yn+1​)n≥1​ and (Yn)n≥1(Y_n)_{n\ge1}(Yn​)n≥1​ have the same joint law. The log-norm process is

xst=log⁡∥Ys+1Ys+2⋯Yt∥∈[−∞,∞),s<t,x_{st}=\log\|Y_{s+1}Y_{s+2}\cdots Y_t\|\in[-\infty,\infty),\qquad s<t,xst​=log∥Ys+1​Ys+2​⋯Yt​∥∈[−∞,∞),s<t,

with log⁡0=−∞\log 0=-\inftylog0=−∞. Expectations of [−∞,∞)[-\infty,\infty)[−∞,∞)-valued variables are extended expectations E(f)=∫f+ dP−∫f− dPE(f)=\int f^+\,dP-\int f^-\,dPE(f)=∫f+dP−∫f−dP, defined when ∫f+ dP<∞\int f^+\,dP<\infty∫f+dP<∞ and possibly equal to −∞-\infty−∞.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6 (p. 893)

If (Yn)(Y_n)(Yn​) is a stationary sequence in a real or complex Banach algebra and E{(log⁡∥Y1∥)+}<∞E\{(\log\|Y_1\|)^+\}<\inftyE{(log∥Y1​∥)+}<∞, then

ξ=lim⁡n→∞n−1log⁡∥Y1Y2⋯Yn∥\xi=\lim_{n\to\infty}n^{-1}\log\|Y_1Y_2\cdots Y_n\|ξ=n→∞lim​n−1log∥Y1​Y2​⋯Yn​∥

exists in −∞≤ξ<∞-\infty\le\xi<\infty−∞≤ξ<∞ with probability one, and

E(ξ)=lim⁡n→∞n−1E{log⁡∥Y1Y2⋯Yn∥}.E(\xi)=\lim_{n\to\infty}n^{-1}E\{\log\|Y_1Y_2\cdots Y_n\|\}.E(ξ)=n→∞lim​n−1E{log∥Y1​Y2​⋯Yn​∥}.

The goal fixes no constant and no ergodicity assumption: ξ\xiξ is in general a non-degenerate random variable.

Milestones

  1. (1.2.7), p. 885: under S₁, S₂ and S₃′, E(xst+)<∞E(x_{st}^+)<\inftyE(xst+​)<∞ for all s<ts<ts<t.
  2. Proof of Theorem 2, p. 886: the truncation xst(N)=max⁡(xst,−N(t−s))x^{(N)}_{st}=\max(x_{st},-N(t-s))xst(N)​=max(xst​,−N(t−s)) is a subadditive process for every positive integer NNN.
  3. Theorem 2, p. 885: if xxx satisfies S₁, S₂ and S₃′ but not S₃, then ξ=lim⁡x0t/t\xi=\lim x_{0t}/tξ=limx0t​/t exists with probability one in [−∞,∞)[-\infty,\infty)[−∞,∞) and E(ξ)=−∞E(\xi)=-\inftyE(ξ)=−∞.
  4. Proof of Theorem 6, p. 893: the log-norm process satisfies S₁, S₂ and S₃′.

Significance

Theorem 6 defines a stochastic spectral radius: if every YnY_nYn​ equals a fixed element yyy, then eξe^\xieξ is the spectral radius of yyy by Gelfand's formula, and for independent YnY_nYn​ with common law π\piπ the limit is a constant ρ(π)\rho(\pi)ρ(π) depending only on π\piπ. For k×kk\times kk×k matrices the theorem reduces to the Furstenberg–Kesten theorem. Theorem 2, the extension of the subadditive ergodic theorem from S₃ to S₃′, is the form needed whenever a process can have mean growth rate −∞-\infty−∞, as happens for products that can vanish or contract superlinearly; it is used well beyond random products.

All results here are proved on paper (Kingman 1973, building on his 1968 paper). None of them is machine-checked: Mathlib has no subadditive ergodic theorem, no Furstenberg–Kesten theorem and no random-product limit in normed algebras. The platform poses an ergodic, constant-limit form of Kingman's theorem (PalmQueueing.Ergodic.kingman_subadditive, open); this mission's Theorem 2 is a different statement (non-ergodic, conclusion E(ξ)=−∞E(\xi)=-\inftyE(ξ)=−∞ under failure of S₃). A complete development would give the first formal proof of the Furstenberg–Kesten limit, in the generality of Banach algebras.

Difficulty

Theorem 6 is short given Theorems 1 and 2, but the obvious one-line reduction to Theorem 1 fails in two places. First, the log-norm process can take the value −∞-\infty−∞ and its means gtg_tgt​ can be −∞-\infty−∞ or decrease superlinearly, so condition S₃ fails and Theorem 1 does not apply; the case E(ξ)=−∞E(\xi)=-\inftyE(ξ)=−∞ is a separate theorem (Theorem 2), whose proof must exchange a limit in ttt with a limit in an auxiliary parameter. Second, stationarity of the log-norm process (S₂) is a statement about joint laws on a path space; in a non-separable Banach algebra, multiplication need not be measurable for the product σ\sigmaσ-algebra on B×B\mathfrak B\times\mathfrak BB×B, so it is not automatic that the law of (Yn)(Y_n)(Yn​) determines the joint law of the products Ys+1⋯YtY_{s+1}\cdots Y_tYs+1​⋯Yt​. The main dependency, Theorem 1 itself, is the subject of a separate mission and is not restated here.

Formalization scope

The Lean development fixes these conventions:

  • Families are functions x : ℕ → ℕ → Ω → β; only pairs s<ts<ts<t enter any condition. S₁ is required almost surely for each triple (the weaker hypothesis); the log-norm milestone proves it at every sample point.
  • S₂ and stationarity are equalities of laws of the whole path (Measure.map) on the product σ\sigmaσ-algebra, not equality of one-dimensional marginals.
  • S₃′ and all positive parts are lower Lebesgue integrals; expectations that may be −∞-\infty−∞ are computed as ∫f+−∫f−\int f^+ - \int f^-∫f+−∫f− in EReal, never as Bochner integrals (which return 000 for non-integrable functions).
  • log⁡∥⋅∥\log\|\cdot\|log∥⋅∥ is ENNReal.log of the norm, so log⁡∥0∥=−∞\log\|0\|=-\inftylog∥0∥=−∞; Real.log 0 = 0 would replace a vanishing product's growth rate −∞-\infty−∞ by 000, and is ruled out.
  • B\mathfrak BB is a complete unital NormedRing with NormedAlgebra 𝕜 𝔅, RCLike 𝕜. Each YnY_nYn​ is strongly measurable; B\mathfrak BB is not assumed separable.
  • Limits are Filter.atTop on ℕ in the topology of EReal; the conclusions assert ξ<∞\xi<\inftyξ<∞ almost surely, E(ξ+)<∞E(\xi^+)<\inftyE(ξ+)<∞, and, for (2.3.5), both the existence of the limit of means and its value.

A formalization that replaces the extended logarithm by Real.log, or the extended expectation by a Bochner integral, makes the statement false or trivially different, and is excluded.

Reusable infrastructure: extended expectations of EReal-valued random variables, joint-law stationarity of sequences and two-parameter families, and the truncation lemma for S₃′ processes. Contributions toward Theorem 1 (mission 1 of this series), toward measurability of products of strongly measurable random elements, and toward the milestones in any order are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. F. C. Kingman, Subadditive ergodic theory, Ann. Probab. 1(6):883–899, 1973. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176996798
  • J. F. C. Kingman, The ergodic theory of subadditive stochastic processes, J. Roy. Statist. Soc. Ser. B 30:499–510, 1968. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.2517-6161.1968.tb00749.x
  • H. Furstenberg and H. Kesten, Products of random matrices, Ann. Math. Statist. 31:457–469, 1960. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177705909
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
Dynamical SystemsOperations ResearchRandom Matrix Theory·Captain: mikedeng1

Subadditive Ergodic Theory 4: Furstenberg–Kesten — for Stationary Positive Random Matrices, n⁻¹ log [Y₁⋯Y_n]_ij Converges, Independently of i and jResearch Paper

Products of random matrices

Many systems evolve by repeated multiplication by a random linear map: the state of a linear system with randomly varying coefficients, population vectors in a random environment (Leslie models whose rates change from year to year), the transfer matrices of a disordered one-dimensional medium, and the transition operators of a Markov chain in a random environment. In each case the object of interest is the product Xn=Y1Y2⋯YnX_n = Y_1 Y_2 \cdots Y_nXn​=Y1​Y2​⋯Yn​ of random matrices and its growth as n→∞n\to\inftyn→∞.

The basic answer is due to Furstenberg and Kesten (Products of random matrices, Ann. Math. Statist. 31 (1960)): under a logarithmic moment condition and stationarity, n−1log⁡n^{-1}\logn−1log of the size of XnX_nXn​ converges. Their proof was a substantial piece of analysis. In his 1973 IMS Special Invited Paper (Kingman, Subadditive ergodic theory, Ann. Probab. 1 (1973)), J. F. C. Kingman showed that for matrices with strictly positive entries the result is a short corollary of his subadditive ergodic theorem (Theorem 1 of that paper, 1968). This mission formalizes that application: Theorem 5 of the 1973 paper, §2.2, pp. 891–892.

Timeline:

  • 1960: Furstenberg and Kesten prove convergence of n−1log⁡∥Xn∥n^{-1}\log\|X_n\|n−1log∥Xn​∥ and, for positive matrices, of n−1log⁡[Xn]ijn^{-1}\log[X_n]_{ij}n−1log[Xn​]ij​.
  • 1968: Kingman proves the subadditive ergodic theorem (J. Roy. Statist. Soc. B 30).
  • 1973: Kingman's survey deduces the positive-matrix theorem (Theorem 5) and the general Banach-algebra version (Theorem 6) from it.

Setting

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space, k≥1k\ge1k≥1, and let Y1,Y2,…Y_1, Y_2,\dotsY1​,Y2​,… be random k×kk\times kk×k real matrices. Write [A]ij[A]_{ij}[A]ij​ for the (i,j)(i,j)(i,j)th entry of a matrix AAA, and

Xn=Y1Y2⋯Yn(2.2.1),X_n = Y_1 Y_2\cdots Y_n \qquad (2.2.1),Xn​=Y1​Y2​⋯Yn​(2.2.1),

the product taken left to right. The sequence (Yn)(Y_n)(Yn​) is stationary if the joint law of (Y2,Y3,… )(Y_2, Y_3, \dots)(Y2​,Y3​,…) equals the joint law of (Y1,Y2,… )(Y_1, Y_2, \dots)(Y1​,Y2​,…); this is a statement about all finite-dimensional distributions at once, and it includes the case of independent identically distributed matrices.

The proof works with the diagonal process

zst=[Ys+1Ys+2⋯Yt]11,xst=−log⁡zst(s<t),z_{st} = [Y_{s+1}Y_{s+2}\cdots Y_t]_{11},\qquad x_{st} = -\log z_{st}\qquad (s<t),zst​=[Ys+1​Ys+2​⋯Yt​]11​,xst​=−logzst​(s<t),

and with the ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​-norm ∥A∥=max⁡i∑j∣[A]ij∣\|A\| = \max_i \sum_j |[A]_{ij}|∥A∥=maxi​∑j​∣[A]ij​∣. A family (xst)s<t(x_{st})_{s<t}(xst​)s<t​ is a subadditive process (§1.1) if S₁: xsu≤xst+xtux_{su}\le x_{st}+x_{tu}xsu​≤xst​+xtu​ for s<t<us<t<us<t<u; S₂: the joint distributions of (xs+1,t+1)(x_{s+1,t+1})(xs+1,t+1​) equal those of (xst)(x_{st})(xst​); S₃: gt=E(x0t)g_t=E(x_{0t})gt​=E(x0t​) exists and gt≥−Atg_t\ge -Atgt​≥−At for some constant AAA.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5

Suppose the elements of the matrices YnY_nYn​ are strictly positive, E∣log⁡[Yn]ij∣<∞E|\log[Y_n]_{ij}|<\inftyE∣log[Yn​]ij​∣<∞ for every nnn and every i,ji,ji,j, and (Yn)(Y_n)(Yn​) is stationary. Then there is one finite random variable λ\lambdaλ such that for every (i,j)(i,j)(i,j)

λ=lim⁡n→∞n−1log⁡[Xn]ij(2.2.2)\lambda = \lim_{n\to\infty} n^{-1}\log [X_n]_{ij} \qquad (2.2.2)λ=n→∞lim​n−1log[Xn​]ij​(2.2.2)

with probability one and in mean. The limit is random in general (it is constant when (Yn)(Y_n)(Yn​) is ergodic); the theorem asserts its existence, its finiteness and its independence of (i,j)(i,j)(i,j), and nothing about its value.

Milestones, in the order of the paper's proof

  1. (2.3.1): [AB]11≥[A]11[B]11[AB]_{11}\ge[A]_{11}[B]_{11}[AB]11​≥[A]11​[B]11​ for matrices with strictly positive entries.
  2. xst=−log⁡zstx_{st}=-\log z_{st}xst​=−logzst​ satisfies S₁ and S₂, and each xstx_{st}xst​ has finite expectation gt−sg_{t-s}gt−s​.
  3. E{log⁡∥Y1∥}<∞E\{\log\|Y_1\|\}<\inftyE{log∥Y1​∥}<∞ and gn/n≥−E{log⁡∥Y1∥}g_n/n\ge -E\{\log\|Y_1\|\}gn​/n≥−E{log∥Y1​∥} for all n≥1n\ge1n≥1, so S₃ holds.
  4. The limit (2.2.2) exists, with probability one and in mean, for i=j=1i=j=1i=j=1.
  5. (2.2.3): for every (i,j)(i,j)(i,j), P{lim inf⁡n−1log⁡[Xn]ij≥λ}=1P\{\liminf n^{-1}\log[X_n]_{ij}\ge\lambda\}=1P{liminfn−1log[Xn​]ij​≥λ}=1.
  6. For every (i,j)(i,j)(i,j), P{lim sup⁡n−1log⁡[Xn]ij≤λ}=1P\{\limsup n^{-1}\log[X_n]_{ij}\le\lambda\}=1P{limsupn−1log[Xn​]ij​≤λ}=1.

Significance

The limit λ\lambdaλ is the top Lyapunov exponent of the random product: it is the almost-sure exponential growth rate of every entry, and hence of every norm, of XnX_nXn​. It governs the stability of random linear recursions vn=vn−1Ynv_{n}=v_{n-1}Y_nvn​=vn−1​Yn​, the long-run growth rate of populations in random environments, and localization in one-dimensional disordered systems. Theorem 5 is the existence statement on which all of these quantitative questions rest.

The theorem has been proved since 1960, and Kingman's derivation is a classical model application of subadditive ergodic theory. To our knowledge it has no machine-checked proof: Mathlib has neither Kingman's subadditive ergodic theorem nor any limit theorem for random matrix products. This mission produces a formal statement of the result together with the formal decomposition of the proof into the steps Kingman writes down; its milestone 4 is exactly where the subadditive ergodic theorem (the goal of the companion mission Subadditive Ergodic Theory 1) is applied.

Difficulty

Milestones 1–3 are deterministic matrix inequalities plus integrability bookkeeping; the substance is elsewhere. First, milestone 4 needs the full subadditive ergodic theorem, almost-sure and in mean, for a non-ergodic stationary process: the classical Birkhoff theorem does not apply, because log⁡[Xn]11\log[X_n]_{11}log[Xn​]11​ is not a sum of stationary increments. Second, passing from the diagonal entry to all entries requires controlling n−1log⁡[Yn]1jn^{-1}\log[Y_n]_{1j}n−1log[Yn​]1j​ along a stationary sequence with only a first-moment hypothesis, and transporting an almost-sure statement about Xn′=Y2⋯Yn+1X_n'=Y_2\cdots Y_{n+1}Xn′​=Y2​⋯Yn+1​ back to XnX_nXn​ by stationarity, where the limit λ\lambdaλ is itself random. The natural shortcut — treating λ\lambdaλ as a constant — is only valid under ergodicity, which is not assumed.

Formalization scope

  • Matrices are Matrix (Fin k) (Fin k) ℝ with NeZero k; the paper's index 111 is 0 : Fin k. The sequence is Y : ℕ → Ω → Matrix …, read only for n≥1n\ge1n≥1; Y 0 plays no role.
  • Products are ordered: Ys+1⋯YtY_{s+1}\cdots Y_tYs+1​⋯Yt​ is the List.prod of [Y (s+1), …, Y t]; X0X_0X0​ is the identity.
  • Stationarity is equality of the laws of (Yn+2)n≥0(Y_{n+2})_{n\ge0}(Yn+2​)n≥0​ and (Yn+1)n≥0(Y_{n+1})_{n\ge0}(Yn+1​)n≥0​ on ℕ → Fin k → Fin k → ℝ with the product σ-algebra. Independence is not assumed.
  • Positivity holds for every outcome; "their logarithms have finite expectations" is integrability of every log⁡[Yn]ij\log[Y_n]_{ij}log[Yn​]ij​, n≥1n\ge1n≥1.
  • "Finite limit" is a real-valued lam : Ω → ℝ; "in mean" is E∣n−1log⁡[Xn]ij−λ∣→0E|n^{-1}\log[X_n]_{ij}-\lambda|\to0E∣n−1log[Xn​]ij​−λ∣→0 with λ\lambdaλ integrable; time is n∈Nn\in\mathbb Nn∈N with Filter.atTop. One lam serves all (i,j)(i,j)(i,j).
  • Lim inf and lim sup inequalities are stated with ε\varepsilonε: almost surely, for every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0, eventually n−1log⁡[Xn]ij≥λ−εn^{-1}\log[X_n]_{ij}\ge\lambda-\varepsilonn−1log[Xn​]ij​≥λ−ε (respectively ≤λ+ε\le\lambda+\varepsilon≤λ+ε), which avoids the junk value of a real liminf on unbounded sequences.
  • Real.log 0 = 0 in Lean; the statements apply log only to entries that are strictly positive under the hypotheses, so no junk value enters. Dropping the positivity hypothesis would change the theorem, and is not an acceptable shortcut.
  • The S₁/S₂ vocabulary of §1.1 comes from the group's shared process module; this mission defines gtg_tgt​ locally. The general subadditive ergodic theorem is not restated here, and milestone 4 is the object-specific statement the paper writes.

Welcome contributions: proofs of the matrix inequalities, the integrability and stationarity transfer lemmas, a formal subadditive ergodic theorem (shared with the companion mission).

Selected references

  • J. F. C. Kingman, Subadditive ergodic theory, Ann. Probab. 1(6):883–899, 1973. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176996798
  • H. Furstenberg and H. Kesten, Products of random matrices, Ann. Math. Statist. 31(2):457–469, 1960. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177705909
  • J. F. C. Kingman, The ergodic theory of subadditive stochastic processes, J. Roy. Statist. Soc. Ser. B 30(3):499–510, 1968. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.2517-6161.1968.tb00749.x
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
AnalysisHarmonic AnalysisStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Distribution Function Inequalities for Martingales 3: For Brownian Motion Stopped at Any Stopping Time τ, EΦ(X*(τ)) and EΦ(τ^{1/2}) Are ComparableResearch Paper

Motivation

The size of a martingale can be measured in two ways: by its maximal function, the largest absolute value it reaches, and by a quadratic quantity that records how much it has moved, the square function in discrete time or the elapsed time in the case of Brownian motion. The Burkholder–Davis–Gundy inequalities say that these two measurements are comparable in every LpL^pLp norm and, more generally, under EΦ(⋅)E\Phi(\cdot)EΦ(⋅) for every Φ\PhiΦ of moderate growth. They are a basic tool of stochastic analysis, harmonic analysis and the theory of stochastic integration.

D. L. Burkholder's 1971 Wald Memorial Lectures, published as Distribution Function Inequalities for Martingales (Ann. Probability 1 (1973)), organise these results around one device: a distribution function inequality ("good-λ\lambdaλ" inequality) between two random variables, which a single lemma then converts into integral inequalities for all Φ\PhiΦ of moderate growth. The paper opens its second chapter with "a particularly easy but important special case": Brownian motion stopped at an arbitrary stopping time. This mission formalizes that case, §§6–8 of the paper.

Timeline. Burkholder proved the LpL^pLp square-function inequalities for martingales, 1<p<∞1<p<\infty1<p<∞, in 1966 (Ann. Math. Statist. 37); B. Davis extended the comparison of the maximal and square functions to p=1p=1p=1 in 1970 (Israel J. Math. 8); Burkholder and R. F. Gundy introduced the extrapolation method for operators on martingales in 1970 (Acta Math. 124); Burkholder, Davis and Gundy proved two-sided Φ\PhiΦ inequalities in 1972 (Proc. Sixth Berkeley Symp. 2, 223–240), the Brownian case being their Theorem 7.2, under the additional assumption that Φ\PhiΦ is the integral of a function that itself satisfies a growth condition. The 1973 paper states Theorem 6.1 below as "Theorem 7.2 of [6] with Φ\PhiΦ more general", that assumption removed.

Setting

Let (Ω,A,P)(\Omega,\mathcal A,P)(Ω,A,P) be a probability space and X={X(t), 0≤t<∞}X=\{X(t),\,0\le t<\infty\}X={X(t),0≤t<∞} a one-dimensional Brownian motion: a real process with independent increments and continuous sample functions, with X(t)X(t)X(t) normally distributed, EX(t)=0EX(t)=0EX(t)=0, EX2(t)=tEX^2(t)=tEX2(t)=t. Let B(t)\mathcal B(t)B(t) be the σ\sigmaσ-field generated by {X(s), 0≤s≤t}\{X(s),\,0\le s\le t\}{X(s),0≤s≤t}. A stopping time of XXX is a function τ:Ω→[0,∞]\tau:\Omega\to[0,\infty]τ:Ω→[0,∞] with {τ<t}∈B(t)\{\tau<t\}\in\mathcal B(t){τ<t}∈B(t) for every t>0t>0t>0. For 0≤b≤∞0\le b\le\infty0≤b≤∞ put

X∗(b)=sup⁡t≥0∣X(b∧t)∣,X^*(b)=\sup_{t\ge0}|X(b\wedge t)| ,X∗(b)=t≥0sup​∣X(b∧t)∣,

so X∗(τ)X^*(\tau)X∗(τ) is the maximal function of Brownian motion stopped at τ\tauτ.

A function Φ:[0,∞]→[0,∞]\Phi:[0,\infty]\to[0,\infty]Φ:[0,∞]→[0,∞] is of moderate growth if it is non-decreasing and continuous, Φ(0)=0\Phi(0)=0Φ(0)=0, and

Φ(2λ)≤c(6.1) Φ(λ),λ>0.(6.1)\Phi(2\lambda)\le c_{(6.1)}\,\Phi(\lambda),\qquad\lambda>0. \tag{6.1}Φ(2λ)≤c(6.1)​Φ(λ),λ>0.(6.1)

Examples are Φ(λ)=λp\Phi(\lambda)=\lambda^pΦ(λ)=λp for 0<p<∞0<p<\infty0<p<∞. No convexity is assumed. In Lean these are IsBM X P, IsStoppingTimeOf X τ, maxStopped X b ω and IsPhi Φ c.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.1

For every stopping time τ\tauτ of XXX,

c EΦ(τ1/2)≤EΦ(X∗(τ))≤C EΦ(τ1/2),(6.2)c\,E\Phi(\tau^{1/2})\le E\Phi(X^*(\tau))\le C\,E\Phi(\tau^{1/2}), \tag{6.2}cEΦ(τ1/2)≤EΦ(X∗(τ))≤CEΦ(τ1/2),(6.2)

where c,C>0c,C>0c,C>0 depend only on c(6.1)c_{(6.1)}c(6.1)​. Neither τ\tauτ nor any moment is assumed finite.

Milestones

  1. (8.1) Wald's identity EX2(τ)=EτEX^2(\tau)=E\tauEX2(τ)=Eτ for a bounded stopping time τ\tauτ (cited in the paper from Doob).
  2. Theorem 6.2. For β>1\beta>1β>1, δ>0\delta>0δ>0 and every λ>0\lambda>0λ>0,
P(τ1/2>βλ, X∗(τ)≤δλ)≤δ2β2−1P(τ1/2>λ),(6.3)P(\tau^{1/2}>\beta\lambda,\ X^*(\tau)\le\delta\lambda)\le\frac{\delta^2}{\beta^2-1}P(\tau^{1/2}>\lambda), \tag{6.3}P(τ1/2>βλ, X∗(τ)≤δλ)≤β2−1δ2​P(τ1/2>λ),(6.3) P(X∗(τ)>βλ, τ1/2≤δλ)≤δ2(β−1)2P(X∗(τ)>λ).(6.4)P(X^*(\tau)>\beta\lambda,\ \tau^{1/2}\le\delta\lambda)\le\frac{\delta^2}{(\beta-1)^2}P(X^*(\tau)>\lambda). \tag{6.4}P(X∗(τ)>βλ, τ1/2≤δλ)≤(β−1)2δ2​P(X∗(τ)>λ).(6.4)
  1. Lemma 7.1. If nonnegative f,gf,gf,g satisfy P(g>βλ,f≤δλ)≤εP(g>λ)P(g>\beta\lambda,f\le\delta\lambda)\le\varepsilon P(g>\lambda)P(g>βλ,f≤δλ)≤εP(g>λ) for all λ>0\lambda>0λ>0, and Φ(βλ)≤γΦ(λ)\Phi(\beta\lambda)\le\gamma\Phi(\lambda)Φ(βλ)≤γΦ(λ), Φ(δ−1λ)≤ηΦ(λ)\Phi(\delta^{-1}\lambda)\le\eta\Phi(\lambda)Φ(δ−1λ)≤ηΦ(λ) with γε<1\gamma\varepsilon<1γε<1, then
EΦ(g)≤γη1−γεEΦ(f).E\Phi(g)\le\frac{\gamma\eta}{1-\gamma\varepsilon}E\Phi(f).EΦ(g)≤1−γεγη​EΦ(f).

Significance

Theorem 6.1 is the Brownian case of the Burkholder–Davis–Gundy inequalities: for Brownian motion the stopping time τ\tauτ plays the role of the square function, since τ\tauτ is the quadratic variation of XXX up to time τ\tauτ. The result controls the stopped maximum through elapsed quadratic variation without a finite-time or integrability assumption. Lemma 7.1 is reusable: the paper applies it again in §§10–21 to discrete-time martingales.

The results are classical and proved; the mission's Lean statements remain open. Mathlib has Brownian motion as a predicate on processes (IsBrownianReal), while this development still needs optional sampling at the paper's stopping times and maximal inequalities for Brownian motion. A formal proof of this mission would provide Wald's identity at bounded optional times, a general good-λ\lambdaλ lemma, and the Brownian inequality with explicit dependence of the constants on c(6.1)c_{(6.1)}c(6.1)​.

Difficulty

The obvious route, integrating the tail bounds (6.3)–(6.4) against dΦd\PhidΦ, does not close by itself: the right-hand side of each good-λ\lambdaλ inequality contains the same random variable as the left-hand side, and nothing in the hypotheses says that EΦ(τ1/2)E\Phi(\tau^{1/2})EΦ(τ1/2) or EΦ(X∗(τ))E\Phi(X^*(\tau))EΦ(X∗(τ)) is finite, nor that τ\tauτ is finite. The theorem has to hold in that generality, with constants that see only c(6.1)c_{(6.1)}c(6.1)​ and not Φ\PhiΦ itself. On the probabilistic side, the stopping times of the paper are defined by the strict events {τ<t}\{\tau<t\}{τ<t} relative to the raw natural filtration B(t)\mathcal B(t)B(t), which is not right-continuous, while the one probabilistic input, Wald's identity (8.1), is a statement about optional sampling of the martingale X2(t)−tX^2(t)-tX2(t)−t in continuous time, for which Mathlib has no theorem yet.

Formalization scope

  • Probability spaces are (Ω : Type) [MeasurableSpace Ω] (P : Measure Ω) [IsProbabilityMeasure P]; time is ℝ≥0 and stopping times are valued in ℝ≥0∞.
  • Brownian motion IsBM X P is Mathlib's IsBrownianReal X P plus two explicit conjuncts the paper assumes: every sample function is continuous, and each X(t)X(t)X(t) is measurable (so B(t)⊆A\mathcal B(t)\subseteq\mathcal AB(t)⊆A). X(0)=0X(0)=0X(0)=0 holds almost surely.
  • IsStoppingTimeOf X τ is exactly the paper's condition {τ<t}∈B(t)\{\tau<t\}\in\mathcal B(t){τ<t}∈B(t), t>0t>0t>0, with B(t)\mathcal B(t)B(t) the raw generated σ\sigmaσ-field; it is weaker than Mathlib's IsStoppingTime, so the theorems are stronger than their Mathlib-stopping-time versions.
  • τ1/2\tau^{1/2}τ1/2, X∗(τ)X^*(\tau)X∗(τ), Φ\PhiΦ and all expectations take values in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞] (ℝ≥0∞, lintegral), with ∞1/2=∞\infty^{1/2}=\infty∞1/2=∞; both sides of (6.2) may be infinite. (8.1) is stated with lintegral on both sides.
  • The growth condition is required for all λ∈[0,∞]\lambda\in[0,\infty]λ∈[0,∞], equivalent to (6.1) by continuity. Φ≢0\Phi\not\equiv0Φ≡0, which the paper assumes "to eliminate the trivial case", is dropped: all conclusions hold trivially for Φ≡0\Phi\equiv0Φ≡0.
  • "The choice of ccc and CCC depends only on c(6.1)c_{(6.1)}c(6.1)​" is formalized with the quantifier order ∀ c, ∃ C₁ C₂ > 0, ∀ Ω P X τ Φ, IsPhi Φ c → …. A version in which the constants are chosen after Φ\PhiΦ, XXX or τ\tauτ would be trivial whenever the right-hand side is positive and is ruled out by this order.
  • In Lemma 7.1, f,gf,gf,g may take the value ∞\infty∞ and γ,η\gamma,\etaγ,η are nonnegative; both choices are harmless (see the item notes).

Contributions welcome: Wald's identity and optional sampling for Brownian motion at optional times, the Lebesgue–Stieltjes layer-cake formula EΦ(h)=∫0∞P(h>λ) dΦ(λ)E\Phi(h)=\int_0^\infty P(h>\lambda)\,d\Phi(\lambda)EΦ(h)=∫0∞​P(h>λ)dΦ(λ) for continuous non-decreasing Φ\PhiΦ (reusable for every Φ\PhiΦ inequality of the series), and the good-λ\lambdaλ lemma, which the later missions of this series share.

Selected references

  • D. L. Burkholder, Distribution function inequalities for martingales, Ann. Probability 1 (1973), 19–42. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176997023
  • D. L. Burkholder, B. J. Davis, R. F. Gundy, Integral inequalities for convex functions of operators on martingales, Proc. Sixth Berkeley Symp. Math. Statist. Probab. 2 (1972), 223–240. https://digicoll.lib.berkeley.edu/record/113227
  • D. L. Burkholder, R. F. Gundy, Extrapolation and interpolation of quasi-linear operators on martingales, Acta Math. 124 (1970), 249–304. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02394576
  • B. Davis, On the integrability of the martingale square function, Israel J. Math. 8 (1970), 187–190. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02771562
  • D. L. Burkholder, Martingale transforms, Ann. Math. Statist. 37 (1966), 1494–1504. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177699141
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
Complexity TheoryInformation TheoryTheoretical Computer Science·Captain: mikedeng1

A Pseudorandom Generator from Any One-Way Function: One-Way Functions Exist If and Only If Pseudorandom Generators ExistResearch Paper

Motivation

Cryptographic protocols use random looking strings that can be reproduced from a shorter private seed. A pseudorandom generator provides those strings if no efficient observer can tell them from uniformly sampled bits. A one-way function provides a different kind of asymmetry: anyone can evaluate it efficiently, but no efficient algorithm can usually recover a preimage of a random output. Håstad, Impagliazzo, Levin, and Luby proved that these two existence questions are equivalent. Their result identifies average-case inversion hardness as sufficient for computational pseudorandomness, without assuming a particular candidate function or algebraic problem (Håstad et al., 1999).

The equivalence is known mathematically; this mission asks for a machine-checked account of its qualitative security claim. The original article develops stronger quantitative time–success comparisons. Those comparisons are relevant to concrete cryptography, but the existence equivalence can be stated through asymptotically negligible success probabilities. This distinction is fixed throughout the formalization.

Setting

At security parameter nnn, a function ensemble FFF receives a string from the Boolean cube {0,1}tn\{0,1\}^{t_n}{0,1}tn​ and returns one in {0,1}ℓn\{0,1\}^{\ell_n}{0,1}ℓn​. The lengths are polynomial-time parameters, and one uniform machine evaluates the family when given 1n1^n1n, separators, an optional unary integer advice value, and the input. The optional advice is polynomially bounded and may depend on nnn without being computable. The goal itself uses no advice.

An adversary is a polynomial-time bit-string machine with polynomially many independent random coins. For inversion it sees Fn(X)F_n(X)Fn​(X) for a uniform input XXX and may return any string x′x'x′ of the correct input length with Fn(x′)=Fn(X)F_n(x')=F_n(X)Fn​(x′)=Fn​(X). It need not recover the original XXX. The ensemble is one-way if that success probability is negligible for every such adversary. For distinguishing, the adversary accepts only by outputting the one-bit string [1][1][1]. Two laws are computationally indistinguishable if every adversary has negligible difference between its acceptance probabilities.

A generator GGG is pseudorandom when tn<ℓnt_n<\ell_ntn​<ℓn​ for positive nnn and its output law on a uniform tnt_ntn​-bit seed is computationally indistinguishable from the uniform law on ℓn\ell_nℓn​ bits. Strict stretch is essential: the identity map would otherwise satisfy the indistinguishability clause. All probabilities are finite counting fractions over Boolean cubes, so neither arbitrary measures nor a default value for an empty event space enters the definitions.

The intermediate results use Shannon entropy and order-two Rényi entropy, both in bits, and statistical distance, half the L1L^1L1 difference of finite laws. A universal hash family is pairwise independent in the exact sense of Definition 4.6: for distinct inputs x,x′x,x'x,x′ and any two prescribed outputs a,a′a,a'a,a′, the chance over the uniform key that both outputs occur is exactly the reciprocal of the square of the output-space size. The public hash key is retained in the extracted output (Håstad et al., 1999, §§2–4).

Formalization targets

Main equivalence

The goal is Theorem 6.3, on printed page 1387:

(∃F  OWF(F))⟺(∃G  PRG(G)).(\exists F\;\mathrm{OWF}(F))\quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad (\exists G\;\mathrm{PRG}(G)).(∃FOWF(F))⟺(∃GPRG(G)).

Existence is the stable target: it does not fix a particular generator or an output-stretch constant. The reverse direction is the one the article attributes to Levin; the forward direction passes through the article's false-entropy and pseudoentropy constructions.

Intermediate targets

Lemma 4.8 bounds the statistical distance of a universal hash output with its public key by 2−(e+1)2^{-(e+1)}2−(e+1) when the source has Rényi entropy at least mmm and the hash output has m−2em-2em−2e bits. Theorem 4.14 converts a pseudoentropy generator into a PRG using the integer lengths and repetition count in Construction 4.13. Lemma 6.4 compares the Shannon entropies of the two Section 6 output laws:

H(E)≥H(D)+10n2,H(\mathcal E)\ge H(\mathcal D)+10n^2,H(E)≥H(D)+10n2,

with kn≥125n3k_n\ge125n^3kn​≥125n3. Theorem 6.2 gives the resulting mildly nonuniform false-entropy generator from a one-way function. The cited Levin direction is a separate existential milestone. These statements are the mission's milestone list, in their attack order (Håstad et al., 1999, pp. 1378–1387).

Significance

The result supplies a general route from any suitable average-case hard inversion task to a source of computational pseudorandom bits. It means an existence theorem for one primitive also settles the existence question for the other; it does not claim that an arbitrary one-bit-stretch generator is itself one-way. The paper's intermediate entropy notions record how much unpredictability remains or appears when outputs have nonuniform statistical laws.

A completed formalization would make the definitions of adversary, negligible advantage, universal hashing, entropy, and the finite output laws independently reusable. The known paper proof is not yet represented by the theorem stubs in this proposal. Formalizing the cited reverse implication, the entropy comparisons, and the links between the paper's intermediate generator notions remains solver work. No claim is made that the quantitative reduction bounds have been machine checked.

Difficulty

The one-way hypothesis only limits efficient inversion of an output; it does not directly say that the output is close to uniform. In particular, the output may carry statistical structure even when finding a preimage is hard. A direct attempt to hash the output without accounting for its varying preimage sizes does not produce the claimed pseudorandom law. The Section 6 construction therefore involves a random index, a hash prefix, independent parity masks, and a second public hash key. Their exact sample spaces matter for both the entropy gap and computational indistinguishability (Håstad et al., 1999, §§4, 6).

Formalization scope

Bit strings are Levin2003.Bits, fixed-length cubes are Levin2003.cube, and polynomial time is Mathlib's TM2 notion through the published Levin2003_owf_model. That module's own OneWay predicate requires length preservation, which Definition 3.2 of this paper does not; this mission defines its own ensemble and one-way predicate. Uniform adversaries receive no advice in the goal. Their coin budgets are polynomially bounded, and their inputs expose the security parameter in unary. Those choices rule out the vacuous encoding with unrestricted adversaries or an invisible security parameter.

The §6 laws use a finite product seed. The printed (6.8) samples index blocks as bit strings of length ⌈log⁡n⌉\lceil\log n\rceil⌈logn⌉, but (6.3) defines f′f'f′ only for indices 0,…,n−10,\ldots,n-10,…,n−1 and (6.5) averages uniformly over that range. The formalization uses Fin n indices. Thus Theorem 6.2 is stated for the repaired finite seed law, with a polynomial-time evaluator on its binary encoding. This exposes a gap between that seed space and Definition 3.9's uniform bit seed; bridging it is part of a complete proof. The prefix of a hash output is padded for the binary law, while the index remains present so the padding loses no information. The real-valued mnm_nmn​ in (6.6) is rounded down to a bit length, and its integer value is the advice for Theorem 6.2. Construction 4.13 retains its printed floor and ceiling. Its pseudoentropy surplus sns_nsn​ may be real-valued, as in the paper; polynomial-time computability of sns_nsn​ is rendered as sn=pn/qns_n=p_n/q_nsn​=pn​/qn​ with natural numbers whose binary expansions are polynomial-time computable from 1n1^n1n.

Lemma 6.4 explicitly bounds approximate degeneracy by n−1n-1n−1, which its printed proof uses without stating. For a one-way function that bound is needed only eventually. Accordingly computational-entropy lower bounds are formulated for all sufficiently large positive nnn; the paper's Definition 3.7 says all nnn. Lemma 6.5's oracle-machine statement and its printed probability constant are left for a separate treatment. The model covers qualitative negligible success, not time–success ratios, expected-time bookkeeping, or labels such as weak-preserving. Contributions that close those quantitative gaps are welcome, as are proofs of the selected milestones and reusable finite-entropy lemmas.

Selected references

  • J. Håstad, R. Impagliazzo, L. A. Levin, and M. Luby, A Pseudorandom Generator from Any One-Way Function, SIAM Journal on Computing 28(4):1364–1396, 1999. DOI: 10.1137/S0097539793244708.
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
Control TheoryStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Backward-Forward Stochastic Differential Equations 2: The Coupled Backward-Forward System Has a Unique Adapted Solution When k Times the H∞ Norm of D Is Below OneResearch Paper

Motivation

A backward-forward stochastic differential equation couples two equations that run in opposite time directions: a forward equation for a state UUU, started from a given input, and a backward equation for a quantity VVV, pinned at a terminal time by a random variable YYY. Each equation's coefficients depend on both unknowns, so the solution at time ttt depends on the past of UUU and on the conditional future of VVV. Such systems arise in stochastic control (the adjoint equation of the stochastic maximum principle runs backward while the state runs forward) and in mathematical finance (an asset's price is forward, a hedge or value process is backward).

Antonelli's 1993 paper (Ann. Appl. Probab. 3(3), 777–793) is one of the first treatments of the coupled problem. Pardoux and Peng (1990) had established existence and uniqueness for decoupled backward equations driven by Brownian motion. Antonelli proved existence and uniqueness for the coupled system under a smallness condition, and gave examples (§3) showing that without such a condition a solution may fail to exist. This mission formalizes the bounded-variation case of that result, Theorem 3.1.

Setting

Fix a horizon T>0T > 0T>0 and a probability space (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) with a filtration (Ft)t≥0(\mathcal F_t)_{t\ge 0}(Ft​)t≥0​ satisfying the usual hypotheses: it is right-continuous, and F0\mathcal F_0F0​ contains every PPP-null set.

An integrator AAA is an adapted process whose paths have bounded variation on [0,T][0,T][0,T], with A0=0A_0 = 0A0​=0. It is written A=A+−A−A = A^+ - A^-A=A+−A− with A±A^\pmA± adapted, nondecreasing and right-continuous, and At++At−=∣A∣tA^+_t + A^-_t = |A|_tAt+​+At−​=∣A∣t​, the total variation of AAA on [0,t][0,t][0,t]. It is bounded: ∣A∣T≤β|A|_T \le \beta∣A∣T​≤β. The pathwise integral ∫sthr dAr\int_s^t h_r\,dA_r∫st​hr​dAr​ is the Lebesgue–Stieltjes integral over (s,t](s,t](s,t].

The system involves two integrators A,CA, CA,C and the increasing process

Dt=max⁡(∣A∣t,∣C∣t),D_t = \max(|A|_t, |C|_t),Dt​=max(∣A∣t​,∣C∣t​),

whose pathwise Stieltjes measure is dDdDdD. The Doléans measure μ\muμ of DDD on (0,T]×Ω(0,T]\times\Omega(0,T]×Ω gives the norm

∥V∥L1(μ)=E(∫0T∣Vt∣ dDt),\|V\|_{L^1(\mu)} = E\Big(\int_0^T |V_t|\,dD_t\Big),∥V∥L1(μ)​=E(∫0T​∣Vt​∣dDt​),

and L1(μ)L^1(\mu)L1(μ) is the space of jointly measurable processes with finite norm. The size of DDD is ∥D∥H∞=ess sup⁡DT\|D\|_{\mathbf H^\infty} = \operatorname{ess\,sup} D_T∥D∥H∞​=esssupDT​.

The data are coefficients f,g:[0,T]×Ω×R2→Rf, g : [0,T]\times\Omega\times\mathbb R^2\to\mathbb Rf,g:[0,T]×Ω×R2→R, a constant k>0k > 0k>0, a terminal value YYY and a forward input JJJ. They satisfy:

  1. f,gf, gf,g are kkk-Lipschitz in (x,y)(x,y)(x,y): ∣ζs(ω,x,y)−ζs(ω,xˉ,yˉ)∣≤k(∣x−xˉ∣+∣y−yˉ∣)|\zeta_s(\omega,x,y) - \zeta_s(\omega,\bar x,\bar y)| \le k(|x-\bar x| + |y-\bar y|)∣ζs​(ω,x,y)−ζs​(ω,xˉ,yˉ​)∣≤k(∣x−xˉ∣+∣y−yˉ​∣) for ζ=f,g\zeta = f, gζ=f,g;
  2. f,gf, gf,g are adapted in (s,ω)(s,\omega)(s,ω);
  3. fs(0,0),gs(0,0)∈L1(μ)f_s(0,0), g_s(0,0) \in L^1(\mu)fs​(0,0),gs​(0,0)∈L1(μ).

In addition Y∈L1(P)Y \in L^1(P)Y∈L1(P) is FT\mathcal F_TFT​-measurable and J∈L1(μ)J \in L^1(\mu)J∈L1(μ) is adapted. The system is

Ut=Jt+∫0tfs(Us,Vs) dAs,Vt=E(∫tTgs(Us,Vs) dCs+Y  ∣  Ft),(3.1–3.2)U_t = J_t + \int_0^t f_s(U_s,V_s)\,dA_s, \qquad V_t = E\Big(\int_t^T g_s(U_s,V_s)\,dC_s + Y \;\Big|\; \mathcal F_t\Big), \tag{3.1–3.2}Ut​=Jt​+∫0t​fs​(Us​,Vs​)dAs​,Vt​=E(∫tT​gs​(Us​,Vs​)dCs​+Y​Ft​),(3.1–3.2)

and its right-hand side defines an operator Γ(U,V)=(F(U,V),G(U,V))\Gamma(U,V) = (F(U,V), G(U,V))Γ(U,V)=(F(U,V),G(U,V)), (3.3). A solution in the L1(μ)⊗L1(μ)L^1(\mu)\otimes L^1(\mu)L1(μ)⊗L1(μ) sense is a pair (U,V)∈L1(μ)⊗L1(μ)(U,V)\in L^1(\mu)\otimes L^1(\mu)(U,V)∈L1(μ)⊗L1(μ) with U=F(U,V)U = F(U,V)U=F(U,V) and V=G(U,V)V = G(U,V)V=G(U,V) μ\muμ-a.e.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.1

If ∣dA∣|dA|∣dA∣ and ∣dC∣|dC|∣dC∣ are dominated by dDdDdD and

k ∥D∥H∞<1,k\,\|D\|_{\mathbf H^\infty} < 1,k∥D∥H∞​<1,

then there is a progressively measurable solution (U,V)(U,V)(U,V) of (3.1)–(3.2) in the L1(μ)⊗L1(μ)L^1(\mu)\otimes L^1(\mu)L1(μ)⊗L1(μ) sense, and any two progressively measurable solutions agree μ\muμ-a.e.:

∥U−U′∥L1(μ)+∥V−V′∥L1(μ)=0.\|U - U'\|_{L^1(\mu)} + \|V - V'\|_{L^1(\mu)} = 0.∥U−U′∥L1(μ)​+∥V−V′∥L1(μ)​=0.

Milestones

  1. Remark 2.2, (2.6): E(H∫[0,∞)a(s) dCs)=E(∫[0,∞)Hsa(s) dCs)E(H\int_{[0,\infty)} a(s)\,dC_s) = E(\int_{[0,\infty)} H_s a(s)\,dC_s)E(H∫[0,∞)​a(s)dCs​)=E(∫[0,∞)​Hs​a(s)dCs​) for an adapted increasing càdlàg CCC, a positive Borel aaa, HHH positive or in L1L^1L1, and the càdlàg version HsH_sHs​ of E(H∣Fs)E(H\mid\mathcal F_s)E(H∣Fs​). The proof of Theorem 3.1 uses it with C=DC = DC=D, a≡1a \equiv 1a≡1.
  2. Γ\GammaΓ maps L1(μ)⊗L1(μ)L^1(\mu)\otimes L^1(\mu)L1(μ)⊗L1(μ) into itself (pp. 785–787).
  3. The Lipschitz estimates (p. 787): ∣F(U,V)t−F(U~,V~)t∣≤k∫0t(∣Us−U~s∣+∣Vs−V~s∣) dDs|F(U,V)_t - F(\tilde U,\tilde V)_t| \le k\int_0^t(|U_s-\tilde U_s| + |V_s-\tilde V_s|)\,dD_s∣F(U,V)t​−F(U~,V~)t​∣≤k∫0t​(∣Us​−U~s​∣+∣Vs​−V~s​∣)dDs​, and the conditional analogue for GGG on (t,T](t,T](t,T].
  4. The contraction estimate (p. 788):
∥Γ(U,V)−Γ(U~,V~)∥L1⊗L1≤k∥D∥H∞ ∥(U,V)−(U~,V~)∥L1⊗L1.\|\Gamma(U,V) - \Gamma(\tilde U,\tilde V)\|_{L^1\otimes L^1} \le k\|D\|_{\mathbf H^\infty}\,\|(U,V) - (\tilde U,\tilde V)\|_{L^1\otimes L^1}.∥Γ(U,V)−Γ(U~,V~)∥L1⊗L1​≤k∥D∥H∞​∥(U,V)−(U~,V~)∥L1⊗L1​.

Significance

The theorem identifies a regime in which a coupled forward-backward system is well posed. The integrability required is only L1L^1L1, and the smallness condition k∥D∥H∞<1k\|D\|_{\mathbf H^\infty} < 1k∥D∥H∞​<1 ties the Lipschitz constant to the total mass of the driving integrators. With As=Cs=sA_s = C_s = sAs​=Cs​=s it reads kT<1kT < 1kT<1, a small-horizon condition. The paper's Example 1 (mission 3 of this series) shows that at k=1k = 1k=1, T≥1T \ge 1T≥1 a solution may fail to exist, so some restriction of this type is necessary. Later work on forward-backward equations, for instance the four-step scheme of Ma, Protter and Yong (1994), replaced the smallness condition by other structural assumptions. Antonelli's small-horizon result remains the base case those methods extend.

The result is proved in the paper. No machine-checked version of it, or of any backward stochastic differential equation, exists in Mathlib or on the platform. The formalization adds three things on top of the paper. It makes the solution concept precise: versions, integrability, and μ\muμ-a.e. equality. It repairs a gap in the printed proof (see Formalization scope). And it builds pathwise Lebesgue–Stieltjes integration against adapted bounded-variation processes, together with the optional projection identity (2.6), as reusable infrastructure.

Difficulty

The Banach fixed point theorem does the final step once the contraction estimate holds. The difficulty lies in reaching that estimate. The VVV-component is a conditional expectation, defined for each ttt only up to a null set, and these null sets accumulate when the process is integrated against dDdDdD, which may charge random times. The estimate has to be transported from "for each ttt, almost surely" to "μ\muμ-almost everywhere". That needs càdlàg versions and the optional projection theorem, which Mathlib lacks. A second point: the naive bound treats the forward and backward differences separately and gives the constant 2k∥D∥H∞2k\|D\|_{\mathbf H^\infty}2k∥D∥H∞​. Obtaining k∥D∥H∞k\|D\|_{\mathbf H^\infty}k∥D∥H∞​ requires combining both differences inside one conditional expectation, and that uses the adaptedness of the forward difference.

Formalization scope

Time is R≥0\mathbb R_{\ge 0}R≥0​ with horizon T>0T > 0T>0; integrators are frozen after TTT. Each integrator carries its minimal Jordan decomposition as data, tied to Mathlib's eVariationOn. Pathwise measures are Mathlib's Stieltjes measures, and integrals are over (s,t](s,t](s,t]. Norms are lower integrals in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]. Every conditional expectation is accompanied by the integrability of its argument, since Mathlib's condExp of a non-integrable function is 000. A version of G(U,V)G(U,V)G(U,V) must be jointly measurable and have càdlàg paths on [0,T][0,T][0,T]. Without the càdlàg requirement, two versions can differ on the graph of a random time charged by dDdDdD, and the contraction estimate fails.

The formalization commits to these readings of the paper:

  • Domination. The paper asserts (p. 786) that ∣A∣≪D|A|\ll D∣A∣≪D and ∣C∣≪D|C|\ll D∣C∣≪D with densities at most 111. This is false for D=max⁡(∣A∣,∣C∣)D = \max(|A|,|C|)D=max(∣A∣,∣C∣) in general: take ∣A∣t=t|A|_t = t∣A∣t​=t and ∣C∣t=2⋅1{t≥ε}|C|_t = 2\cdot 1\{t\ge\varepsilon\}∣C∣t​=2⋅1{t≥ε}. It is assumed explicitly, as "D−∣A∣D - |A|D−∣A∣ and D−∣C∣D - |C|D−∣C∣ are nondecreasing on [0,T][0,T][0,T]". The paper's Example 1 (A=CA = CA=C) satisfies it.
  • Adaptedness. "Adapted" solutions are progressively measurable. For each (x,y)(x,y)(x,y), f(⋅,⋅,x,y)f(\cdot,\cdot,x,y)f(⋅,⋅,x,y) is required to be progressively measurable, since with a merely adapted integrand ∫0tf dA\int_0^t f\,dA∫0t​fdA need not be adapted. The weaker printed hypothesis is kept for ggg.
  • Norm of DDD. ∥D∥H∞\|D\|_{\mathbf H^\infty}∥D∥H∞​ is ess sup⁡DT\operatorname{ess\,sup} D_TesssupDT​, not the bound β\betaβ. The hypothesis k∥D∥H∞<1k\|D\|_{\mathbf H^\infty} < 1k∥D∥H∞​<1 is weaker than kβ<1k\beta < 1kβ<1, and the theorem keeps it.
  • Small departures. The constant k1k_1k1​ bounding JJJ becomes finiteness. "∣A∣T,∣C∣T<β|A|_T, |C|_T < \beta∣A∣T​,∣C∣T​<β" becomes "≤β\le \beta≤β". In the positive case of Remark 2.2, the version of E(H∣Ft)E(H\mid\mathcal F_t)E(H∣Ft​) is [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]-valued and characterized by its integrals over Ft\mathcal F_tFt​-sets.

The solution concept rules out trivial solutions. It requires U,V∈L1(μ)U, V\in L^1(\mu)U,V∈L1(μ), the integrability of every argument of the conditional expectation, and a càdlàg version, and existence asserts a progressively measurable pair. A pair satisfying the equations only through Lean's junk values therefore does not count.

A complete development needs:

  • measurability of pathwise Stieltjes integrals in ω\omegaω;
  • the optional projection theorem for càdlàg processes (Dellacherie–Meyer VI.47, VI.57);
  • existence of càdlàg versions of martingales under the usual hypotheses;
  • completeness of L1L^1L1 over the progressive σ-algebra.

All four are reusable well beyond this mission. Contributions to any of them are welcome, as is a proof of any milestone in isolation.

Selected references

  • F. Antonelli, Backward-forward stochastic differential equations, Ann. Appl. Probab. 3(3) (1993) 777–793. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoap/1177005363
  • E. Pardoux, S. Peng, Adapted solution of a backward stochastic differential equation, Systems Control Lett. 14 (1990) 55–61. https://doi.org/10.1016/0167-6911(90)90082-6
  • C. Dellacherie, P.-A. Meyer, Probabilities and Potential B: Theory of Martingales, North-Holland Mathematics Studies 72, 1982. ISBN 0-444-86526-8
  • P. Protter, Stochastic Integration and Differential Equations, Springer, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-662-02619-9
  • J. Ma, P. Protter, J. Yong, Solving forward-backward stochastic differential equations explicitly — a four step scheme, Probab. Theory Related Fields 98 (1994) 339–359. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01192258
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Implicit Renewal Theory and Tails of Solutions of Random Equations 1: The Implicit Renewal Theorem — If E|M|^κ = 1 Then P(R > t) ~ C₊t^{−κ} and P(R < −t) ~ C₋t^{−κ}Research Paper

Motivation

Many stochastic models produce a stationary quantity RRR that solves a random equation R=dΨ(R)R \overset{d}{=} \Psi(R)R=dΨ(R), with Ψ\PsiΨ a random map independent of RRR. The random difference equation R=dQ+MRR \overset{d}{=} Q + MRR=dQ+MR (perpetuities in insurance and finance, the ARCH and GARCH volatility models, random walks in random environments), the Lindley equation S=d(X+S)+S \overset{d}{=} (X+S)^+S=d(X+S)+ of queueing theory, and the random recurrences behind probabilistic analyses of algorithms are all of this form. In these models the law of RRR is rarely explicit, while the decay of its tail P(R>t)P(R>t)P(R>t) is what governs ruin probabilities, extreme values and buffer overflows.

Kesten (1973) showed that the stationary solution of R=dQ+MRR \overset{d}{=} Q + MRR=dQ+MR has a power-law tail when E∣M∣κ=1E|M|^\kappa = 1E∣M∣κ=1 for some κ>0\kappa>0κ>0, by a long argument specific to that equation. Goldie (1991) separated the renewal-theoretic core of the phenomenon from the particular equation: the implicit renewal theorem (Theorem 2.3) gives the power-law tail of any random variable RRR whose tails are comparable to those of MRMRMR, with an explicit formula for the constant. Kesten's theorem and the tail results for several other random equations then follow by checking one integrability condition. The theorem is the standard entry point to the subject, reproduced in the monograph of Buraczewski, Damek and Mikosch (2016).

Timeline:

  • Kesten (1973): power tails for multivariate random difference equations, including the one-dimensional case R=dQ+MRR \overset{d}{=} Q+MRR=dQ+MR.
  • Grincevičius (1975, 1981): limit laws for random walks on the line and the random difference equation R=dQ+MRR \overset{d}{=} Q+MRR=dQ+MR in one dimension (Lithuanian Math. J. 15, 21).
  • Goldie (1991): the implicit renewal theorem for arbitrary RRR, explicit constants, rates of convergence, and applications to several random equations.

Setting

Let (Ω,A,P)(\Omega,\mathcal A,P)(Ω,A,P) be a probability space and MMM, RRR two independent real random variables. No equation is assumed for RRR.

A probability law on R\mathbb RR is arithmetic if it is concentrated on a lattice {nλ:n∈Z}\{n\lambda:n\in\mathbb Z\}{nλ:n∈Z} for some λ>0\lambda>0λ>0, and nonarithmetic otherwise. Fix κ>0\kappa>0κ>0. The Cramér-type conditions on MMM are

E∣M∣κ=1,E∣M∣κlog⁡+∣M∣<∞,the law of log⁡∣M∣ given M≠0 is nonarithmetic.E|M|^\kappa = 1,\qquad E|M|^\kappa\log^+|M|<\infty,\qquad \text{the law of }\log|M|\text{ given }M\ne0\text{ is nonarithmetic.}E∣M∣κ=1,E∣M∣κlog+∣M∣<∞,the law of log∣M∣ given M=0 is nonarithmetic.

Under them, m:=E∣M∣κlog⁡∣M∣m := E|M|^\kappa\log|M|m:=E∣M∣κlog∣M∣ is finite and positive (Lemma 2.2), with 0alog⁡0:=00^a\log 0 := 00alog0:=0.

The tails of RRR enter through two tail-comparison conditions

(2.8) ∫0∞∣P(R>t)−P(MR>t)∣ tκ−1dt<∞,(2.9) ∫0∞∣P(R<−t)−P(MR<−t)∣ tκ−1dt<∞,\text{(2.8)}\ \int_0^\infty|P(R>t)-P(MR>t)|\,t^{\kappa-1}dt<\infty,\qquad \text{(2.9)}\ \int_0^\infty|P(R<-t)-P(MR<-t)|\,t^{\kappa-1}dt<\infty ,(2.8) ∫0∞​∣P(R>t)−P(MR>t)∣tκ−1dt<∞,(2.9) ∫0∞​∣P(R<−t)−P(MR<−t)∣tκ−1dt<∞,

and the constants

C±=1m∫0∞(P(±R>t)−P(±MR>t))tκ−1dt,C=12m∫0∞(P(∣R∣>t)−P(∣MR∣>t))tκ−1dt.C_\pm=\frac1m\int_0^\infty\bigl(P(\pm R>t)-P(\pm MR>t)\bigr)t^{\kappa-1}dt, \qquad C=\frac1{2m}\int_0^\infty\bigl(P(|R|>t)-P(|MR|>t)\bigr)t^{\kappa-1}dt .C±​=m1​∫0∞​(P(±R>t)−P(±MR>t))tκ−1dt,C=2m1​∫0∞​(P(∣R∣>t)−P(∣MR∣>t))tκ−1dt.

In the Lean development these are CramerConditions κ (P.map M), cramerMean, TailCondPlus, TailCondMinus, Cplus, Cminus and Ctwo, in the namespace GoldieRenewal.Implicit.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.3

Let MMM satisfy the Cramér-type conditions and let RRR be independent of MMM.

Case 1 (M≥0M\ge0M≥0 a.s.): (2.8) implies P(R>t)∼C+t−κP(R>t)\sim C_+t^{-\kappa}P(R>t)∼C+​t−κ, and (2.9) implies P(R<−t)∼C−t−κP(R<-t)\sim C_-t^{-\kappa}P(R<−t)∼C−​t−κ, as t→∞t\to\inftyt→∞.

Case 2 (P(M<0)>0P(M<0)>0P(M<0)>0): (2.8) and (2.9) together imply

tκP(R>t)→C,tκP(R<−t)→C,t→∞.t^\kappa P(R>t)\to C,\qquad t^\kappa P(R<-t)\to C,\qquad t\to\infty .tκP(R>t)→C,tκP(R<−t)→C,t→∞.

The relation P(R>t)∼C+t−κP(R>t)\sim C_+t^{-\kappa}P(R>t)∼C+​t−κ means tκP(R>t)→C+t^\kappa P(R>t)\to C_+tκP(R>t)→C+​, including C+=0C_+=0C+​=0.

Milestones

Lemma 2.2 (negative drift of log⁡∣M∣\log|M|log∣M∣, m∈(0,∞)m\in(0,\infty)m∈(0,∞)); Lemmas 9.1–9.2 (smoothed integrable functions are directly Riemann-integrable); Lemma 9.3 (a Tauberian step from averaged to pointwise tails); the renewal equation (9.8) rˇ=gˇ1∗ν\check r=\check g_1*\nurˇ=gˇ​1​∗ν and its key-renewal limit in Case 1; the Case 2a step law (9.11) with mean 2m2m2m and nonarithmetic (9.12)–(9.13), and the renewal identity (9.15); the reduction (9.16) of Case 2b to Case 1.

Significance

The theorem turns a question about an unknown law into a question about integrability. For a random equation R=dΨ(R)R\overset{d}{=}\Psi(R)R=dΨ(R) it suffices to compare Ψ(R)\Psi(R)Ψ(R) with MRMRMR, which is often a moment computation; this yields power tails, with constants given by expectations, for perpetuities, Lindley-type equations, random polynomial and maximum equations (Goldie 1991, §§4–8). The explicit constant also decides when the tail is genuinely of order t−κt^{-\kappa}t−κ: the theorem has content only when E∣R∣κ=∞E|R|^\kappa=\inftyE∣R∣κ=∞, since otherwise C++C−=0C_++C_-=0C+​+C−​=0.

The theorem has been proved for thirty years; it is not formalized in any proof assistant known to the mission. A formal development would provide reusable infrastructure absent from Mathlib: direct Riemann integrability, renewal measures of walks on the whole line, the two-sided key renewal theorem (Athreya, McDonald and Ney 1978), and a Tauberian lemma for monotone tails. The sibling missions on Kesten's theorem and on rates of convergence are built on the same setting.

Difficulty

The obvious argument writes P(R>t)P(R>t)P(R>t) as a telescoping sum along the multiplicative walk Πn=M1⋯Mn\Pi_n=M_1\cdots M_nΠn​=M1​⋯Mn​ and applies the key renewal theorem to the result. It fails at three points. First, the function the key renewal theorem would be applied to, g1(t)=eκt(P(R>et)−P(MR>et))g_1(t)=e^{\kappa t}(P(R>e^t)-P(MR>e^t))g1​(t)=eκt(P(R>et)−P(MR>et)), is only integrable under (2.8), not directly Riemann-integrable, and the key renewal theorem is false for general integrable functions; so no conclusion about P(R>t)P(R>t)P(R>t) itself follows directly. Second, when MMM takes both signs, log⁡∣Πn∣\log|\Pi_n|log∣Πn​∣ alone is not a random walk that controls P(ΠnR>et)P(\Pi_nR>e^t)P(Πn​R>et): the sign of Πn\Pi_nΠn​ decides which tail of RRR is involved, so the walk is Markov-modulated. Third, the walk lives on the whole line and may jump to −∞-\infty−∞ (when P(M=0)>0P(M=0)>0P(M=0)>0), so renewal theory on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), the version in most textbooks, does not apply.

Formalization scope

  • One probability space with IsProbabilityMeasure P; M, R measurable real random variables; independence is IndepFun R M P. In (9.16) the copy M′M'M′ lives on the same space, with IdentDistrib M' M P P and iIndepFun of (R,M,M′)(R,M,M')(R,M,M′).
  • Cramér conditions are stated on the law P.map M; the moments are lower Lebesgue integrals in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]. The conditional law in (2.5) conditions on {x≠0}\{x\neq0\}{x=0} before taking log⁡∣x∣\log|x|log∣x∣, so Lean's Real.log 0 = 0 never enters; Elog⁡∣M∣E\log|M|Elog∣M∣ is an extended real with log⁡0=−∞\log 0=-\inftylog0=−∞.
  • Tails are real numbers P.real {ω | t < R ω} with the paper's strict inequalities. (2.8), (2.9) are IntegrableOn … (Set.Ioi 0); the constants are Bochner integrals, used only under the corresponding integrability hypothesis.
  • "∼\sim∼" is Tendsto (fun t => t ^ κ * P.real {…}) atTop (𝓝 C).
  • Direct Riemann integrability follows Feller (1971, §XI.1), with suprema in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]. The smoothing is fˇ(t)=∫−∞te−(t−u)f(u) du\check f(t)=\int_{-\infty}^t e^{-(t-u)}f(u)\,dufˇ​(t)=∫−∞t​e−(t−u)f(u)du.
  • The tilted law η\etaη, its renewal measure and the Case 2a laws are defined from the law of MMM; no i.i.d. sequence appears in a statement.

Three formalizations would trivialize the goal and are excluded: reading "∼\sim∼" as a ratio P(R>t)/(C+t−κ)→1P(R>t)/(C_+t^{-\kappa})\to1P(R>t)/(C+​t−κ)→1 (which is false when C+=0C_+=0C+​=0); assuming E∣R∣κ<∞E|R|^\kappa<\inftyE∣R∣κ<∞ (which forces C++C−=0C_++C_-=0C+​+C−​=0); and placing a key-renewal-theorem conclusion among the hypotheses.

Contributions welcome: proofs of any milestone; a general two-sided key renewal theorem for nonarithmetic laws with positive mean (reusable beyond this mission); Mathlib-quality lemmas on direct Riemann integrability and renewal measures.

Selected references

  • C. M. Goldie, Implicit renewal theory and tails of solutions of random equations, Ann. Appl. Probab. 1(1):126–166, 1991. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoap/1177005985
  • H. Kesten, Random difference equations and renewal theory for products of random matrices, Acta Math. 131:207–248, 1973. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02392040
  • K. B. Athreya, D. McDonald, P. Ney, Limit theorems for semi-Markov processes and renewal theory for Markov chains, Ann. Probab. 6(5):788–797, 1978. https://doi.org/10.1214/aop/1176995429
  • W. Feller, An Introduction to Probability Theory and Its Applications, Vol. II, 2nd ed., Wiley, 1971.
  • D. Buraczewski, E. Damek, T. Mikosch, Stochastic Models with Power-Law Tails: The Equation X = AX + B, Springer, 2016. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-319-29679-1
14 thms2 active usersReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryMachine LearningStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Asymptotic Calibration: The Regret-Balancing Randomised Forecast on the Grid {0, 1/k, …, 1} with k ≥ 1/ε² Is ε-Calibrated against Every Adaptive NatureResearch Paper

Motivation

A probability forecast is useful only when its stated frequencies bear a stable relation to outcomes. If a forecaster repeatedly announces a 70% chance of rain, calibration asks whether rain occurs on about 70% of those days. This is a minimal reliability requirement for probabilistic prediction, even though calibration alone does not rank every pair of forecasts by usefulness. Foster and Vohra study the difficulty of obtaining this property when the weather sequence is chosen in response to a forecaster's past behavior. A deterministic rule can be forced into a persistent calibration error; the article shows how randomized forecasts evade that obstruction when Nature sees past forecasts but cannot see the current random draw. Foster and Vohra, 1998.

The work sits at an intersection of sequential probability forecasting and repeated games. Its opponent can adapt to the whole observed history, including the forecaster's earlier random outcomes. The simultaneity of each round matters: before choosing that round's wet or dry outcome, Nature knows the distribution of the next forecast but not which forecast is realized. The paper's main result is about a specified forecasting rule constructed from regret balances, rather than merely the existence of some successful randomized strategy. Foster and Vohra, 1998, §§3, 5.

Timeline. Dawid (1982) proposed calibration as a criterion for sequential probability forecasts and showed that a coherent Bayesian expects to be calibrated (doi). Oakes (1985), with Dawid's accompanying comment, showed that no deterministic forecaster is calibrated against every outcome sequence: Nature may rain exactly when the forecast is at most 1/21/21/2 (doi). Foster and Vohra circulated the present randomized construction from 1994 (received August 1994, published 1998); their 1997 Games and Economic Behavior paper used a calibrated forecaster built on the same pairwise-regret flow equations to reach correlated equilibria (doi). Hart and Mas-Colell (2000) later turned the same internal-regret quantities into regret matching (doi).

Setting

At round sss, the outcome XsX_sXs​ is 111 for wet and 000 for dry. The forecaster selects a probability from the finite grid Gk={0,1/k,…,1}G_k=\{0,1/k,\ldots,1\}Gk​={0,1/k,…,1}, where kkk is a positive integer. A forecast ppp is represented by the binary probability vector (1−p,p)(1-p,p)(1−p,p); the second coordinate is the forecast chance of rain. The forecaster chooses i/ki/ki/k with probability μsi\mu_s^iμsi​. The Brier loss of that possible forecast is Lsi=(Xs−i/k)2L_s^i=(X_s-i/k)^2Lsi​=(Xs​−i/k)2.

After ttt rounds, nt(p)n_t(p)nt​(p) counts the realized forecasts equal to ppp, and ρt(p)\rho_t(p)ρt​(p) is the observed fraction of wet outcomes on those rounds. The quadratic calibration score is

Ct=∑p∈Gknt(p)t(ρt(p)−p)2.C_t=\sum_{p\in G_k}\frac{n_t(p)}{t}\bigl(\rho_t(p)-p\bigr)^2.Ct​=p∈Gk​∑​tnt​(p)​(ρt​(p)−p)2.

A forecast never issued has zero count and contributes zero. The paper also uses a weighted calibration score C~t\widetilde C_tCt​, in which the realized indicator that i/ki/ki/k was chosen is replaced by its conditional probability μsi\mu_s^iμsi​. Its weighted count is n~t(i/k)=∑s<tμsi\widetilde n_t(i/k)=\sum_{s<t}\mu_s^int​(i/k)=∑s<t​μsi​, and its weighted wet frequency is ρ~t(i/k)=∑s<tμsiXs/n~t(i/k)\widetilde\rho_t(i/k)=\sum_{s<t}\mu_s^i X_s/\widetilde n_t(i/k)ρ​t​(i/k)=∑s<t​μsi​Xs​/nt​(i/k) when the denominator is positive.

For grid points i/ki/ki/k and j/kj/kj/k, the pairwise regret Rti→jR_t^{i\to j}Rti→j​ is the positive part of the cumulative weighted reduction in Brier loss that would result from replacing i/ki/ki/k by j/kj/kj/k on rounds weighted by μsi\mu_s^iμsi​. The algorithm chooses its next distribution so that the regret flow out of each iii equals the flow into iii:

μsi∑jRs−1i→j=∑jμsjRs−1j→i.\mu_s^i\sum_j R_{s-1}^{i\to j} =\sum_j\mu_s^j R_{s-1}^{j\to i}.μsi​j∑​Rs−1i→j​=j∑​μsj​Rs−1j→i​.

These equations use only regret from previous rounds. They specify a distribution after every possible history, including histories created by Nature's adaptive choices. Foster and Vohra, 1998, §5.

Formalization targets

Main theorem

The target is Theorem 1: for every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0, choose k≥1/ε2k\ge1/\varepsilon^2k≥1/ε2 and let the forecaster follow the regret-flow equations. Against every adaptive Nature, the realized score eventually satisfies

Pr⁡{Ct<ε}>1−ε.\Pr\{C_t<\varepsilon\}>1-\varepsilon.Pr{Ct​<ε}>1−ε.

The time after which the inequality holds may depend on the forecaster, Nature, and ε\varepsilonε. The statement fixes the algorithm and the grid scale; a general existence theorem would leave out its central content. Foster and Vohra, 1998, Theorem 1 and §6 Corollary.

Supporting targets

The milestones record the source's attack path: solvability of the flow equations, a history-adapted forecaster satisfying them, the counting-process bounds and convergence of Ct−C~tC_t-\widetilde C_tCt​−Ct​ in probability, the algebraic link between calibration and regret, the bound on the smoothed regret potential, and the deterministic bound on C~t\widetilde C_tCt​. Theorem 3's last constant is written as (k+1)/(2δ)(k+1)/(2\delta)(k+1)/(2δ) and the corollary's horizon as 8k2/ε28k^2/\varepsilon^28k2/ε2; the printed constants are inconsistent with the paper's k+1k+1k+1 grid points and its derived rate, respectively. The provenance and corrections are recorded with those milestones. Foster and Vohra, 1998, §6.

Significance

The result gives a concrete randomized forecaster whose realized empirical frequencies remain reliable even when outcomes react to past forecasts. The game model includes fixed outcome sequences as a special case, but its adaptive Nature can condition future choices on every earlier realized forecast and outcome. The theorem therefore identifies a particular sequential rule, its finite forecast grid, and the information boundary under which its guarantee holds. Foster and Vohra, 1998, §§3, 5–6.

The published Foster–Vohra 1997 formalization already supplies reusable definitions of finite probability vectors, history laws, pairwise regret, and calibration scores, together with a proved finite flow-conservation theorem. This mission extends that substrate to the 1998 paper's Brier-loss grid algorithm. Theorem 1 and its supporting results are proved on paper but not yet formalized; the earlier formal existence theorem for some calibrated forecaster does not establish this algorithm's guarantee, which is the content of the goal.

Difficulty

The weighted score C~t\widetilde C_tCt​ is controlled by quantities known from the chosen mixtures, while CtC_tCt​ depends on the actual random draws. A direct deterministic bound on CtC_tCt​ therefore does not follow from the regret equations. The gap requires a quantitative comparison of realized counts and weighted counts under an adaptive history law, followed by a passage from those count errors to the nonlinear calibration score. The regret itself has a positive-part kink, so its aggregate bound is stated through the paper's smoothed potential. Foster and Vohra, 1998, §6.

Formalization scope

The Lean model uses binary outcomes, k+1k+1k+1 grid indices Fin (k + 1), and histories ordered from oldest to newest. Rounds start at index 000: the paper's Rs−1R_{s-1}Rs−1​ in round sss is the regret over the preceding sss indices. Forecast and outcome are drawn independently conditional on the past by the published histLaw; Nature is any map from complete past histories to a probability distribution on the two outcomes. The forecast rule is likewise a map from histories to grid distributions. For each earlier round it reads only that round's prefix, so the current outcome cannot influence its mixture.

The goal uses the realized quadratic score calibScore2Hj h 1, whose second vector coordinate is the wet probability. The map i↦(1−i/k,i/k)i\mapsto(1-i/k,i/k)i↦(1−i/k,i/k) is injective for k>0k>0k>0. The weighted score is a separate definition used in supporting results. A forecaster satisfying the flow equations is shown to exist by a milestone, so the goal's algorithm hypothesis has content. The statement covers adaptive Nature; replacing Nature by a fixed sequence or replacing CtC_tCt​ by C~t\widetilde C_tCt​ would change the claim.

Every theorem requiring the grid has the explicit k>0k>0k>0 condition. Deterministic calibration bounds assume binary outcomes and probability-vector weights; the history-law theorems obtain these properties from Fin 2 and PMF. When a weighted count is zero, Lean's division convention gives weighted wet frequency 000; nonnegative weights make its numerator zero as well. At horizon 000, the weighted calibration score is 000. The probability event is measured with the history law's outer measure in R≥0∪{∞}\mathbb R_{\ge0}\cup\{\infty\}R≥0​∪{∞}. Reusable work includes finite-history martingale estimates, weighted calibration comparisons, and finite regret-potential bounds.

Selected references

  • D. P. Foster and R. V. Vohra, Asymptotic calibration, Biometrika 85(2):379–390, 1998. DOI: 10.1093/biomet/85.2.379.
  • A. P. Dawid, The well-calibrated Bayesian, Journal of the American Statistical Association 77:605–613, 1982. DOI: 10.1080/01621459.1982.10477856.
  • D. Oakes, Self-calibrating priors do not exist, Journal of the American Statistical Association 80:339, 1985, with comments by A. P. Dawid (pp. 340–341) and M. Schervish (pp. 341–342). DOI: 10.1080/01621459.1985.10478117.
  • D. P. Foster and R. V. Vohra, Calibrated learning and correlated equilibrium, Games and Economic Behavior 21:40–55, 1997. DOI: 10.1006/game.1997.0595.
  • D. Blackwell, An analog of the minimax theorem for vector payoffs, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 6:1–8, 1956. DOI: 10.2140/pjm.1956.6.1.
  • S. Hart and A. Mas-Colell, A simple adaptive procedure leading to correlated equilibrium, Econometrica 68:1127–1150, 2000. DOI: 10.1111/1468-0262.00153.
14 thms2 active usersReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Negative Dynamic Programming IV: Switching at Each Stage to the Policy with the Better Continuation Return Does at Least as Well as Both PoliciesResearch Paper

Motivation

Policy improvement is one of the two classical ways of solving a Markov decision problem: start from a policy, compute its return, and change the decision wherever another action looks better against that return. Howard (1960, Dynamic Programming and Markov Processes) introduced it for finite state and action spaces, and Blackwell (1965) proved it for discounted problems on Borel spaces. A related routine combines two given policies instead of improving one: at each state, follow whichever policy has the larger return there. Eaton and Zadeh (1962, J. Basic Eng. Ser. D 84, 23–29) proved that this combination of two stationary policies is at least as good as both in the negative case with finite state and action spaces (as credited on p. 889 of Strauch's paper).

Strauch's paper Negative Dynamic Programming (Ann. Math. Statist. 37 (1966) 871–890) treats the negative case: all one-stage returns are non-positive (costs) and there is no discounting. This case covers stochastic shortest-path and optimal-stopping problems with positive costs, where expected total returns may be −∞-\infty−∞ and the contraction arguments of the discounted case are not available. Section 9 of the paper shows that both improvement routines remain valid there, for arbitrary randomized history-dependent policies on Borel spaces, and that they fail in the positive case (Examples 4.2 and 9.1 of the paper).

Timeline:

  • 1960, Howard: policy iteration for finite state and action spaces.
  • 1962, Eaton and Zadeh: the two-policy combination for finite negative problems.
  • 1965, Blackwell: both routines for discounted problems with Borel state and action spaces.
  • 1966, Strauch, §9: Howard's routine (Theorem 9.2), the history-dependent switching theorem (Theorem 9.3) and its Markov and stationary forms (Corollaries 9.1, 9.2) in the negative case on Borel spaces.

Setting

The state space SSS and the action space AAA are non-empty Borel sets. The law of motion q(⋅∣s,a)q(\cdot\mid s,a)q(⋅∣s,a) is a probability kernel from S×AS\times AS×A to SSS, and the return r(s,a,t)r(s,a,t)r(s,a,t) is a Borel function with −∞<r≤0-\infty<r\le 0−∞<r≤0 whose one-step expectation ∫r(s,a,t) q(dt∣s,a)\int r(s,a,t)\,q(dt\mid s,a)∫r(s,a,t)q(dt∣s,a) is finite at every (s,a)(s,a)(s,a). There is no discounting (β=1\beta=1β=1).

A policy π=(π1,π2,… )\pi=(\pi_1,\pi_2,\dots)π=(π1​,π2​,…) chooses the nnn-th action ana_nan​ from a probability kernel πn(⋅∣h)\pi_n(\cdot\mid h)πn​(⋅∣h) that may depend on the whole history h=(s1,a1,…,an−1,sn)h=(s_1,a_1,\dots,a_{n-1},s_n)h=(s1​,a1​,…,an−1​,sn​). The expected return from the initial state sss is

I(π)(s)=∑n=1∞π1q⋯πnqr (s)∈[−∞,0],I(\pi)(s)=\sum_{n=1}^{\infty}\pi_1q\cdots\pi_nqr\,(s)\in[-\infty,0],I(π)(s)=n=1∑∞​π1​q⋯πn​qr(s)∈[−∞,0],

the sum of the expected one-stage returns. For a terminal reward w≤0w\le 0w≤0 that depends on the history (s1,a1,…,sn+1)(s_1,a_1,\dots,s_{n+1})(s1​,a1​,…,sn+1​), In(π,w)I_n(\pi,w)In​(π,w) is the expected return of following π\piπ for nnn stages and then receiving www.

Given two policies σ\sigmaσ and τ\tauτ, their continuation returns at a history h=(s1,…,sn)h=(s_1,\dots,s_n)h=(s1​,…,sn​) are

un(h)=∑j=n∞σnq⋯σjqr (h),vn(h)=∑j=n∞τnq⋯τjqr (h),u_n(h)=\sum_{j=n}^{\infty}\sigma_nq\cdots\sigma_jqr\,(h),\qquad v_n(h)=\sum_{j=n}^{\infty}\tau_nq\cdots\tau_jqr\,(h),un​(h)=j=n∑∞​σn​q⋯σj​qr(h),vn​(h)=j=n∑∞​τn​q⋯τj​qr(h),

the expected returns from stage nnn on if σ\sigmaσ, respectively τ\tauτ, is used from hhh on with its own kernels fed the full history. The switching policy π\piπ uses σn\sigma_nσn​ on Bn={un>vn}B_n=\{u_n>v_n\}Bn​={un​>vn​} and τn\tau_nτn​ on its complement. In Lean these objects are contReturn, IsSwitch, wmax (for wn=max⁡(un,vn)w_n=\max(u_n,v_n)wn​=max(un​,vn​)), InH (for In(π,w)I_n(\pi,w)In​(π,w)) and I, in the namespace NegativeDP.Switching.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 9.3 (negative case)

For all policies σ,τ\sigma,\tauσ,τ, the switching rule defines a policy π\piπ, and every such π\piπ satisfies

I(π)≥max⁡(I(σ),I(τ))at every initial state.I(\pi)\ge\max\big(I(\sigma),I(\tau)\big)\quad\text{at every initial state.}I(π)≥max(I(σ),I(τ))at every initial state.

Milestones (proof of Theorem 9.3, p. 888)

With wn=max⁡(un,vn)w_n=\max(u_n,v_n)wn​=max(un​,vn​) and π\piπ the switching policy:

I0(π,w1)=w1=max⁡(I(σ),I(τ)),I_0(\pi,w_1)=w_1=\max(I(\sigma),I(\tau)),I0​(π,w1​)=w1​=max(I(σ),I(τ)), wn=πn(r+un+1) on Bn,wn=πn(r+vn+1) on Bnc,w_n=\pi_n(r+u_{n+1})\text{ on }B_n,\qquad w_n=\pi_n(r+v_{n+1})\text{ on }B_n^c,wn​=πn​(r+un+1​) on Bn​,wn​=πn​(r+vn+1​) on Bnc​, wn≤πn(r+wn+1),In−1(π,wn)≤In(π,wn+1),In−1(π,wn)≥max⁡(I(σ),I(τ)).w_n\le\pi_n(r+w_{n+1}),\qquad I_{n-1}(\pi,w_n)\le I_n(\pi,w_{n+1}),\qquad I_{n-1}(\pi,w_n)\ge\max(I(\sigma),I(\tau)).wn​≤πn​(r+wn+1​),In−1​(π,wn​)≤In​(π,wn+1​),In−1​(π,wn​)≥max(I(σ),I(τ)).

Further results (not milestones)

Theorem 9.2 (Howard): if I(f,π)≥I(π)I(f,\pi)\ge I(\pi)I(f,π)≥I(π) then I(f(∞))≥I(π)I(f^{(\infty)})\ge I(\pi)I(f(∞))≥I(π). Corollary 9.1: the switching theorem for Markov policies, comparing I(n−1σ)I(^{n-1}\sigma)I(n−1σ) and I(n−1τ)I(^{n-1}\tau)I(n−1τ) at the current state. Corollary 9.2 (Eaton–Zadeh): for stationary f(∞),g(∞)f^{(\infty)},g^{(\infty)}f(∞),g(∞), the rule h=fh=fh=f where I(f(∞))≥I(g(∞))I(f^{(\infty)})\ge I(g^{(\infty)})I(f(∞))≥I(g(∞)) and h=gh=gh=g elsewhere satisfies I(h(∞))≥max⁡(I(f(∞)),I(g(∞)))I(h^{(\infty)})\ge\max(I(f^{(\infty)}),I(g^{(\infty)}))I(h(∞))≥max(I(f(∞)),I(g(∞))).

Significance

Theorem 9.3 yields an improvement step that needs only the returns of two policies, not an optimality equation or a value function. Its Markov and stationary forms give policy-combination results usable for stochastic shortest-path and positive-cost problems, and together with Theorem 9.2 they justify policy-iteration schemes in the negative case on general state spaces. Example 9.1 of the paper shows that no comparable routine exists in the positive case, so the sign assumption is essential.

The results are proved in the paper. No machine-checked version of any of them exists, for the negative case or on Borel spaces; the related items on Prove2Me treat finite or discounted models. This mission produces the statements in Lean over Blackwell's published model of history-dependent plans, a construction of continuation returns from an arbitrary history, and terminal rewards that depend on the whole history.

Difficulty

The argument of the discounted case, which passes to the limit through the vanishing tail βnwn\beta^n w_nβnwn​, is not available: with β=1\beta=1β=1 the terminal term does not vanish, and returns may be −∞-\infty−∞. Comparing unu_nun​ and vnv_nvn​ at the current state only is not enough either: for history-dependent policies the continuation returns depend on the whole history, and the switching set BnB_nBn​ must be shown to be Borel in the history before the switching rule is even a policy. The induction also requires integrating extended-real terminal rewards against the history law and identifying the integral of the one-step operator with the next-stage expected return.

Formalization scope

  • Borel sets are non-empty standard Borel types; Baire functions are measurable functions. Policies are Blackwell's DiscountedDP.Stationary.Plan (one Markov kernel per decision, on Hist S A n). Decisions are numbered from 000 in Lean, so Lean's index nnn is the paper's stage n+1n+1n+1.
  • Only the negative case is formalized (r≤0r\le0r≤0 real-valued, qqq-integrable at every (s,a)(s,a)(s,a), β=1\beta=1β=1). The paper states Theorem 9.3 for the discounted and negative cases; the discounted case is not part of this mission.
  • Returns lie in [−∞,0][-\infty,0][−∞,0] and are EReal values computed as minus the lintegral of the loss −r-r−r; Bochner integrals and toReal are never used, so a return of −∞-\infty−∞ is not silently turned into 000. I(π)I(\pi)I(π) is the sum of stage expectations, equal to eπρe_\pi\rhoeπ​ρ by monotone convergence.
  • Terminal rewards are read through their negative parts; they are applied only to wn≤0w_n\le 0wn​≤0.
  • The switching policy is characterized by the predicate IsSwitch, not constructed. A statement "every switching policy satisfies the bound" would hold vacuously if no plan satisfied the rule; the goal therefore also asserts that a switching plan exists, which is the content of the paper's "define π\piπ by". The same pattern is used in Corollaries 9.1 and 9.2 (the rule defines a measurable decision rule).
  • Ties un=vnu_n=v_nun​=vn​ go to τ\tauτ in Theorem 9.3, and I(n−1σ)=I(n−1τ)I(^{n-1}\sigma)=I(^{n-1}\tau)I(n−1σ)=I(n−1τ) to gng_ngn​ in Corollary 9.1 (strict >>> as printed); in Corollary 9.2 ties go to fff (non-strict ≥\ge≥ as printed).
  • Lemma 3.1 (In(π,0)↓I(π)I_n(\pi,0)\downarrow I(\pi)In​(π,0)↓I(π)), used in the last step of the proof, is posed in mission I of this series and not repeated here.

Contributions welcome: measurability of continuation returns in the history (needed for the existence part), the identification of the history law with the continuation law from the initial state, and a Chapman–Kolmogorov identity for the continuation kernels. These are reusable in any development on history-dependent policies over Borel spaces.

Selected references

  • R. E. Strauch, Negative Dynamic Programming, Ann. Math. Statist. 37(4) (1966) 871–890. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177699369
  • D. Blackwell, Discounted Dynamic Programming, Ann. Math. Statist. 36(1) (1965) 226–235. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177700285
  • J. H. Eaton and L. A. Zadeh, Optimal pursuit strategies in discrete-state probabilistic systems, J. Basic Eng. Ser. D 84 (1962) 23–29 (reference [7] of Strauch's paper).
  • R. A. Howard, Dynamic Programming and Markov Processes, MIT Press, 1960.
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Negative Dynamic Programming I: With Non-Positive Rewards, If an Optimal Policy Exists Then an Optimal Stationary Policy ExistsResearch Paper

Motivation

Many sequential decision problems accumulate costs that are never recovered: inventory holding and shortage costs, waiting times, the expected number of steps until a target is reached. Written as rewards, these are non-positive rewards summed over an infinite horizon without discounting. Ralph Strauch's paper Negative Dynamic Programming (Ann. Math. Statist. 37 (1966), doi:10.1214/aoms/1177699369) is the foundational treatment of this negative case on general Borel state and action spaces. It complements Blackwell's treatment of the discounted case (Blackwell 1965) and of the positive bounded case (Blackwell 1964, mimeographed), and it sets out which conclusions of the discounted theory survive when rewards are non-positive and undiscounted.

A central question in that theory is how simple an optimal policy can be taken to be. A policy may in principle randomize and consult the entire past history. Strauch showed that in the negative case, whenever an optimal policy exists, an optimal stationary one exists, using one measurable decision rule at every stage. This mission formalizes that result together with the reduction from general policies to semi-Markov ones on which its proof rests.

Timeline. Blackwell (1965) proved that in the discounted case a stationary optimal policy exists whenever an optimal policy does, and gave an example showing that Markov policies need not suffice on Borel spaces. Strauch (1966) proved the corresponding statement for the negative case and proved that semi-Markov policies, which remember the initial state as well as the current one, are enough.

Setting

A negative dynamic programming problem consists of non-empty Borel sets SSS (states) and AAA (actions), a law of motion q(⋅∣s,a)q(\cdot\mid s,a)q(⋅∣s,a), which is a probability kernel from S×AS\times AS×A to SSS, and a Borel return function r(s,a,t)r(s,a,t)r(s,a,t) with

r≤0,r>−∞,∫r(s,a,t) dq(t∣s,a)>−∞  for all (s,a).r\le 0,\qquad r>-\infty,\qquad \int r(s,a,t)\,dq(t\mid s,a)>-\infty\ \ \text{for all }(s,a).r≤0,r>−∞,∫r(s,a,t)dq(t∣s,a)>−∞  for all (s,a).

There is no discounting. A policy π=(π1,π2,… )\pi=(\pi_1,\pi_2,\dots)π=(π1​,π2​,…) chooses the action ana_nan​ at stage nnn from a probability kernel πn(⋅∣hn)\pi_n(\cdot\mid h_n)πn​(⋅∣hn​), where hn=(s1,a1,…,an−1,sn)h_n=(s_1,a_1,\dots,a_{n-1},s_n)hn​=(s1​,a1​,…,an−1​,sn​) is the history. A policy is Markov if an=fn(sn)a_n=f_n(s_n)an​=fn​(sn​) for Borel maps fn:S→Af_n:S\to Afn​:S→A, semi-Markov if an=gn(s1,sn)a_n=g_n(s_1,s_n)an​=gn​(s1​,sn​) for Borel gng_ngn​, and stationary, written f(∞)f^{(\infty)}f(∞), if an=f(sn)a_n=f(s_n)an​=f(sn​) for one Borel rule fff. Random Markov and random semi-Markov policies draw ana_nan​ from kernels in sns_nsn​, respectively (s1,sn)(s_1,s_n)(s1​,sn​).

The expected total return from the initial state sss is

I(π)(s)=∑n=1∞Esπ r(sn,an,sn+1)∈[−∞,0],I(\pi)(s)=\sum_{n=1}^{\infty}\mathbb E^{\pi}_{s}\,r(s_n,a_n,s_{n+1})\in[-\infty,0],I(π)(s)=n=1∑∞​Esπ​r(sn​,an​,sn+1​)∈[−∞,0],

the optimal return is v∗(s)=sup⁡πI(π)(s)v^*(s)=\sup_\pi I(\pi)(s)v∗(s)=supπ​I(π)(s) over all policies, and π∗\pi^*π∗ is optimal if I(π∗)(s)≥v∗(s)I(\pi^*)(s)\ge v^*(s)I(π∗)(s)≥v∗(s) for every sss. For a Borel rule fff, the operator TTT acts on non-positive Borel functions uuu by

Tu(s)=∫r(s,f(s),t)+u(t) dq(t∣s,f(s)).Tu(s)=\int r(s,f(s),t)+u(t)\,dq(t\mid s,f(s)).Tu(s)=∫r(s,f(s),t)+u(t)dq(t∣s,f(s)).

The namespace is NegativeDP.Stationary. The objects above are Problem, Plan, I, In, vstar, IsOptimal and T.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 8.3 (negative case), p. 886

(∃ π∗  I(π∗)≥v∗) ⟹ ∃ f Borel,  I(f(∞))≥v∗.\big(\exists\,\pi^*\ \ I(\pi^*)\ge v^*\big)\ \Longrightarrow\ \exists\,f\ \text{Borel},\ \ I(f^{(\infty)})\ge v^* .(∃π∗  I(π∗)≥v∗) ⟹ ∃f Borel,  I(f(∞))≥v∗.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 2.1: for a kernel q(⋅∣x)q(\cdot\mid x)q(⋅∣x) and a Borel u≤0u\le 0u≤0 on X×YX\times YX×Y there is a Borel fff with u(x,f(x))≥∫u(x,y) dq(y∣x)u(x,f(x))\ge\int u(x,y)\,dq(y\mid x)u(x,f(x))≥∫u(x,y)dq(y∣x).
  2. Lemma 3.1 (N): In(π)↓I(π)I_n(\pi)\downarrow I(\pi)In​(π)↓I(π).
  3. Lemma 4.1 (a), (b): policies built from the conditional laws of ana_nan​ given (s1,sn)(s_1,s_n)(s1​,sn​), respectively given sns_nsn​ under an initial law ppp, reproduce the laws of (s1,sn,an,sn+1)(s_1,s_n,a_n,s_{n+1})(s1​,sn​,an​,sn+1​), respectively the ppp-averaged laws of (sn,an,sn+1)(s_n,a_n,s_{n+1})(sn​,an​,sn+1​).
  4. Theorem 4.1: for every policy π\piπ and initial law ppp there are a random semi-Markov π∗\pi^*π∗ and a random Markov π∗∗\pi^{**}π∗∗ with I(π)=I(π∗)I(\pi)=I(\pi^*)I(π)=I(π∗) and pI(π)=pI(π∗∗)pI(\pi)=pI(\pi^{**})pI(π)=pI(π∗∗) for every return function.
  5. Theorem 4.2 (N): if I(πnσ)≥I(σ)I(\pi^n\sigma)\ge I(\sigma)I(πnσ)≥I(σ) for all large nnn, then I(π)≥I(σ)I(\pi)\ge I(\sigma)I(π)≥I(σ).
  6. Theorem 4.3 (N): a semi-Markov τ\tauτ with I(τ)≥I(π)I(\tau)\ge I(\pi)I(τ)≥I(π) and a Markov σ\sigmaσ with pI(σ)≥pI(π)pI(\sigma)\ge pI(\pi)pI(σ)≥pI(π).
  7. Theorem 5.1 (N), parts (a)–(g): the properties of TTT, including TI(π)=I(f,π)TI(\pi)=I(f,\pi)TI(π)=I(f,π), TI(f(∞))=I(f(∞))=lim⁡nTn0TI(f^{(\infty)})=I(f^{(\infty)})=\lim_n T^n0TI(f(∞))=I(f(∞))=limn​Tn0 and In(π,v)=T1⋯TnvI_n(\pi,v)=T_1\cdots T_nvIn​(π,v)=T1​⋯Tn​v for Markov π\piπ.

Significance

Theorem 8.3 reduces a search over all randomized, history-dependent policies to a search over single measurable decision rules, whenever an optimal policy exists at all. It underlies policy iteration and the stationary-policy conclusions of the later negative-programming literature, and it shows that the negative case behaves like the discounted case on this point. In the positive case only a weaker statement holds. The reduction of §4 (Theorems 4.1–4.3) is reused throughout the paper: Theorem 8.1 on (p,ε)(p,\varepsilon)(p,ε)-optimal Markov policies starts from Theorem 4.3, and the value-iteration results of §9 use Lemma 3.1 and Theorem 5.1.

All results in this mission are proved in the paper. None of them has a machine-checked proof that we know of. The closest formal result is part 2 of Bertsekas's Proposition 7, formalized in an abstract monotone-mapping model (MonotoneDP.Increase.prop7_optimal_stationary_criterion). There, policies are sequences of selectors, so it contains neither the measure-theoretic reduction from randomized history-dependent policies nor Borel state spaces. The formal work here is to build the law of the controlled process on Borel spaces, carry out the conditional-distribution argument of Theorem 4.1, and combine it with the operator calculus of §5.

Difficulty

The obvious argument starts from an optimal π∗\pi^*π∗, takes its first decision rule fff, and shows that f(∞)f^{(\infty)}f(∞) is optimal. That fails for a general π∗\pi^*π∗, because its first action may be randomized and its later actions may depend on the entire history. One first needs Theorem 4.3, which says a non-random semi-Markov policy is at least as good. That theorem needs two things. One is Theorem 4.1, which replaces a history-dependent policy by one built from conditional distributions of actions, and this requires disintegration of measures on Borel spaces. The other is the measurable selection of Lemma 2.1, which the paper takes from Theorem 2 of Blackwell and Ryll-Nardzewski 1963, applied stage by stage, with Theorem 4.2 to pass to the limit. On Borel spaces Markov policies are not enough (Blackwell's example, Example 4.1 of the paper), so the semi-Markov step cannot be skipped. Returns can equal −∞-\infty−∞, and every limit exchange has to respect that.

Formalization scope

Borel sets are non-empty standard Borel types and Baire functions are measurable functions. The return rrr is real-valued, non-positive and integrable under q(⋅∣s,a)q(\cdot\mid s,a)q(⋅∣s,a) for every (s,a)(s,a)(s,a). Returns live in the extended reals. I(π)I(\pi)I(π), In(π,v)I_n(\pi,v)In​(π,v), TTT and all integrals of non-positive functions are computed as minus lower Lebesgue integrals of the corresponding losses in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], so a return of −∞-\infty−∞ is never collapsed to 000. I(π)I(\pi)I(π) is the sum of stage expectations, which equals the paper's expectation of the total return by monotone convergence. v∗v^*v∗ is the supremum over every randomized history-dependent plan. Restricting it to Markov or stationary policies would make the goal weaker, and that encoding is ruled out. Only the negative case (r≤0r\le 0r≤0, β=1\beta=1β=1) is formalized. Results the paper labels "D, P, N" or "D, N" appear here in their N form.

Explicit choices:

  • Lean numbers decisions from 000. Hist S A n is the paper's Hn+1H_{n+1}Hn+1​ and the plan's kernel κ n is πn+1\pi_{n+1}πn+1​.
  • The objects π∗\pi^*π∗ and π∗∗\pi^{**}π∗∗ of Lemma 4.1 are defined in the paper's proof as conditional distributions. Here their defining property is a hypothesis: for every initial state, or after averaging over ppp, the joint law of (sn,an)(s_n,a_n)(sn​,an​) is the law of sns_nsn​ followed by the kernel.
  • In Theorem 4.1, "for any return function rrr" is a quantifier over every negative problem with the same law of motion, placed after the choice of π∗\pi^*π∗ and π∗∗\pi^{**}π∗∗.
  • In Theorem 5.1 (b), u+cu+cu+c is required to lie in M(S)M(S)M(S). In (d), the increasing part holds only on {sup⁡jTuj>−∞}\{\sup_jTu_j>-\infty\}{supj​Tuj​>−∞}.
  • In Theorem 5.1 (f), TTT is applied to I(π)I(\pi)I(π) for a general plan with no measurability hypothesis. The lower integral is defined for every function.

Infrastructure needed: the law of the controlled process (built here by iterated kernel composition, as in the published DiscountedDP.Stationary model), disintegration of kernels on standard Borel spaces, a measurable selection theorem of Blackwell–Ryll-Nardzewski type, and monotone convergence for lower integrals. The disintegration and selection results are reusable well beyond this paper. Contributions to Theorems 4.1 and 4.3 are especially welcome, since missions II–IV of this series build on them.

Selected references

  • R. E. Strauch, Negative Dynamic Programming, Ann. Math. Statist. 37(4) (1966) 871–890. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177699369
  • D. Blackwell, Discounted Dynamic Programming, Ann. Math. Statist. 36(1) (1965) 226–235. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177700285
  • D. Blackwell and C. Ryll-Nardzewski, Non-existence of everywhere proper conditional distributions, Ann. Math. Statist. 34(1) (1963) 223–225. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177704259
16 thms2 active usersReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimal Ordering and Rationing Policies in a Nonstationary Dynamic Inventory Model with n Demand Classes I: Critical Rationing Levels z̄ₜ¹ ≥ ⋯ ≥ z̄ₜⁿ Give an Optimal Policy When Each aₜ Is 0 or 1Research Paper

Motivation

A firm that holds a single stock of a product often serves customers of different priority: military and civilian requisitions, contract and spot customers, emergency and routine orders for spare parts. When stock runs short, it must decide not only how much demand to satisfy but whose. Satisfying a low-priority order now may leave the firm unable to serve a high-priority order that arrives later in the same replenishment cycle. Inventory rationing asks for the optimal rule.

Veinott (Optimal policy in a dynamic, single product, nonstationary inventory model with several demand classes, Operations Research 13 (1965)) studied a model with nnn demand classes, but fixed in advance the rule that a lower class is served only when every higher class has been served in full, and gave conditions on the costs under which that rule is optimal. Topkis (Management Science 15 (1968), 160–176) dropped the fixed rule and characterized the optimal rationing policy within a replenishment period. Theorem 1 of that paper is the target of this mission. It extends the author's earlier two-class analysis; the two-class case was later partly rediscovered by Evans and by Kaplan. Critical-level rationing policies of this kind are a standard object in the later literature on multi-class inventory systems.

Setting

A period between two replenishments is divided into kkk intervals, indexed backwards: interval ttt has t−1t-1t−1 intervals after it, so the period starts in interval kkk and ends in interval 111. Demand comes in classes 1,…,n1,\dots,n1,…,n, with class nnn the most important. At the start of interval ttt the firm holds stock z≥0z\ge0z≥0 and faces the outstanding demand vector B=(B1,…,Bn)≥0B=(B^1,\dots,B^n)\ge0B=(B1,…,Bn)≥0: the backlog bbb carried in plus the new demand dtd_tdt​, whose law μt\mu_tμt​ on [0,∞)n[0,\infty)^n[0,∞)n has finite means. Demands of different intervals are independent.

The firm chooses the vector uuu of demand left unsatisfied, with 0≤u≤B0\le u\le B0≤u≤B, so that w=z−1⋅(B−u)≥0w=z-\mathbf 1\cdot(B-u)\ge0w=z−1⋅(B−u)≥0 units remain in stock, where 1⋅y=∑jyj\mathbf 1\cdot y=\sum_j y^j1⋅y=∑j​yj. It pays the penalty pt⋅up_t\cdot upt​⋅u and the holding cost ht(w)h_t(w)ht​(w). A fraction at≥0a_t\ge0at​≥0 of the unsatisfied demand is carried into the next interval: bt−1=atub_{t-1}=a_tubt−1​=at​u, with at=1a_t=1at​=1 meaning complete backlogging and at=0a_t=0at​=0 lost sales. At the end of interval 111 the salvage cost v1(z)+v2(z−1⋅b)v_1(z)+v_2(z-\mathbf 1\cdot b)v1​(z)+v2​(z−1⋅b) is charged. The standing assumptions are:

  • (A) hth_tht​ is convex and continuous on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞);
  • (B) v1v_1v1​ is convex and continuous on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), v2v_2v2​ is convex and continuous on R\mathbb RR, and D+v2D^+v_2D+v2​ is bounded below, where D+D^+D+ is the right derivative;
  • (C) 0≤pt1≤⋯≤ptn0\le p_t^1\le\cdots\le p_t^n0≤pt1​≤⋯≤ptn​.

The minimal expected cost ftf_tft​ of the last ttt intervals and its expectation gtg_tgt​ satisfy

ft(z,B)=inf⁡0≤u≤Bw=z−1⋅(B−u)≥0[pt⋅u+ht(w)+gt−1(w,atu)],gt(z,b)=E ft(z,b+dt),f_t(z,B)=\inf_{\substack{0\le u\le B\\ w=z-\mathbf 1\cdot(B-u)\ge0}}\big[p_t\cdot u+h_t(w)+g_{t-1}(w,a_tu)\big],\qquad g_t(z,b)=\mathbb E\,f_t(z,b+d_t),ft​(z,B)=0≤u≤Bw=z−1⋅(B−u)≥0​inf​[pt​⋅u+ht​(w)+gt−1​(w,at​u)],gt​(z,b)=Eft​(z,b+dt​),

with g0(z,b)=v1(z)+v2(z−1⋅b)g_0(z,b)=v_1(z)+v_2(z-\mathbf 1\cdot b)g0​(z,b)=v1​(z)+v2​(z−1⋅b).

For a class jjj, with δj\delta_jδj​ its unit vector, the critical rationing level zˉtj∈[0,+∞]\bar z_t^j\in[0,+\infty]zˉtj​∈[0,+∞] is +∞+\infty+∞ if φtj(w)=ptjw+ht(w)+gt−1(w,atwδj)\varphi_t^j(w)=p_t^jw+h_t(w)+g_{t-1}(w,a_tw\delta_j)φtj​(w)=ptj​w+ht​(w)+gt−1​(w,at​wδj​) is strictly decreasing on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), and is the smallest minimizer of φtj\varphi_t^jφtj​ on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) otherwise. With B(j)=∑i≥jBiB^{(j)}=\sum_{i\ge j}B^iB(j)=∑i≥j​Bi, the rationing level policy leaves unsatisfied

uj=(B(j)−z+zˉtj)+∧Bj.u^j=\big(B^{(j)}-z+\bar z_t^j\big)^+\wedge B^j .uj=(B(j)−z+zˉtj​)+∧Bj.

In words: going down from class nnn, it serves as much of each class as it can without letting the stock fall below that class's critical level.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1

Suppose ai∈{0,1}a_i\in\{0,1\}ai​∈{0,1} for every i≤ti\le ti≤t. Then

  1. the rationing level policy attains ft(z,B)f_t(z,B)ft​(z,B) for every z≥0z\ge0z≥0, B≥0B\ge0B≥0;
  2. the critical levels are ordered as
zˉt1≥zˉt2≥⋯≥zˉtn;\bar z_t^1\ge\bar z_t^2\ge\cdots\ge\bar z_t^n;zˉt1​≥zˉt2​≥⋯≥zˉtn​;
  1. for ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0, the differences ft(z,B)−ft(z+ε,B+εδj)f_t(z,B)-f_t(z+\varepsilon,B+\varepsilon\delta_j)ft​(z,B)−ft​(z+ε,B+εδj​) and gt(z,b)−gt(z+ε,b+εδj)g_t(z,b)-g_t(z+\varepsilon,b+\varepsilon\delta_j)gt​(z,b)−gt​(z+ε,b+εδj​) do not depend on B1,…,BjB^1,\dots,B^jB1,…,Bj and b1,…,bjb^1,\dots,b^jb1,…,bj.

Milestones

In attack order:

  1. Lemma 1: the infimum of a convex function over one block of variables is convex.
  2. Lemma 2: gtg_tgt​ and ftf_tft​ are convex and continuous on the orthant, and the infimum in (1) is a minimum.
  3. The critical levels exist, so they are well defined.
  4. Lemma 3: moving ε\varepsilonε of demand from class iii to a less important class j<ij<ij<i does not raise ftf_tft​ or gtg_tgt​.
  5. (6): ft(z,B)=min⁡wft(w;z,B)f_t(z,B)=\min_wf_t(w;z,B)ft​(z,B)=minw​ft​(w;z,B), where ft(w;z,B)f_t(w;z,B)ft​(w;z,B) is the cost of issuing exactly z−wz-wz−w units.
  6. Lemma 4: for each www, serving the classes in order of importance is optimal.
  7. Corollary 1: some optimal uuu never serves a class before every more important class has been served in full.

A companion item states the paper's remark that with a linear ordering cost c(y)=c⋅yc(y)=c\cdot yc(y)=c⋅y the optimal order is y(z)=(y(0)−z)+y(z)=(y(0)-z)^+y(z)=(y(0)−z)+.

Significance

Theorem 1 reduces the nnn-dimensional rationing decision in each interval to nnn numbers, which are computed from one-dimensional convex minimizations. Under complete or no backlogging this is the structural result that the rest of the paper builds on: the monotonicity of the levels in time (Theorem 2), the reduction of the backlog case to a single-interval problem (Theorem 3), and the multi-period ordering policy (Theorem 4). The hypothesis on aia_iai​ is sharp in the sense the paper shows: for a2∈(0,1)a_2\in(0,1)a2​∈(0,1) an example on pp. 165–166 has no optimal policy of this form.

The theorem is proved in the paper, but no part of it is machine-checked. A formal development would contribute a reusable treatment of finite-horizon dynamic programs whose value function is defined by an infimum and an expectation over an orthant, with convexity and continuity propagated through the recursion. It would also contribute the comparative statics of critical-level policies.

Difficulty

The obvious argument proves optimality of the rationing level policy by induction from convexity alone. That is not enough. Convexity gives a one-dimensional problem in www (by (6) and Lemma 4). But identifying its minimizer with the class-wise critical levels requires the marginal value of class-jjj demand to be independent of the demand of the less important classes, which is part (c). Part (c) is false when 0<at<10<a_t<10<at​<1, so the induction must carry (a), (b) and (c) together and use at∈{0,1}a_t\in\{0,1\}at​∈{0,1} at every step. A second difficulty is analytic: ftf_tft​ is an infimum and gtg_tgt​ an expectation, and before any structural argument starts the value functions must be shown to be finite, attained, continuous and integrable on the closed orthant (Lemma 2).

Formalization scope

  • Representation. Classes are Fin n; the paper's class jjj is index j−1j-1j−1, so class nnn is the largest index and (b) is Antitone. Intervals are natural numbers counted backwards, as in the paper. Vectors are Fin n → ℝ with the pointwise order.
  • Value functions. ftf_tft​ is defined by the recursion (1) itself, with a real infimum (sInf), and gtg_tgt​ by a Bochner integral against μt\mu_tμt​. Every statement about ftf_tft​, gtg_tgt​ is restricted to z≥0z\ge0z≥0 and B≥0B\ge0B≥0 (or b≥0b\ge0b≥0). Lemma 2's attainment and integrability conjuncts are what identify these values with the paper's.
  • Critical levels. The levels live in WithTop ℝ, with ⊤=+∞\top=+\infty⊤=+∞. They are specified by the predicate IsCriticalLevel: strictly decreasing for +∞+\infty+∞, smallest minimizer otherwise. They are never computed by a real sInf, which would give the junk value 000 when no minimizer exists.
  • Standing assumptions. (A)–(C) are imposed for 1≤t≤k1\le t\le k1≤t≤k. (B)'s limit condition is read as "D+v2D^+v_2D+v2​ is bounded below". D+D^+D+ is an extended-real right Dini derivative. Assumption (D) on the ordering cost is not used.
  • Added hypothesis. Lemma 1 adds the hypothesis that the function is bounded below on every fibre, because a real infimum cannot be −∞-\infty−∞.
  • Not stated. The paper's remark that Assumption (D) ensures an optimal order y(z)y(z)y(z) exists for a general continuous ccc is not formalized. With n=k=1n=k=1n=k=1, h1(w)=w2h_1(w)=w^2h1​(w)=w2, c(w)=w−w2c(w)=w-w^2c(w)=w−w2, p1=1p_1=1p1​=1, v1=v2=0v_1=v_2=0v1​=v2​=0 and demand 111 with certainty, (D) holds but c(y)+g1(y,0)=1−yc(y)+g_1(y,0)=1-yc(y)+g1​(y,0)=1−y for y≥1y\ge1y≥1, so no minimizer exists.
  • Ruled out. Theorem 1 is not proved by assuming Lemma 2, the shape of the optimal vector, or the paper's derivative formulas (8)–(9). Those appear only as milestones or not at all. Part (a) asserts optimality over all feasible uuu, not among rationing level policies.
  • Contributions welcome. Proofs of the milestones, general lemmas on convexity of partial infima and on continuity of parametric minima over polytopes, and integrability of functions of linear growth against laws with finite means.

Selected references

  • D. M. Topkis, Optimal ordering and rationing policies in a nonstationary dynamic inventory model with n demand classes, Management Science 15(3) (1968), 160–176. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.15.3.160
  • A. F. Veinott, Jr., Optimal policy in a dynamic, single product, nonstationary inventory model with several demand classes, Operations Research 13(5) (1965), 761–778. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.13.5.761
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970 (convexity of partial minima, Theorem 5.7). https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
Mathematical Physics·Captain: mikedeng1

Concentration of Measure and Isoperimetric Inequalities in Product Spaces XIII: The Sherrington–Kirkpatrick Model at High Temperature — Deviations of log Z_N from β²N/4Textbook

Motivation

The Sherrington–Kirkpatrick model assigns random interactions to every pair of spins in a system. Its partition function aggregates the weights of all spin configurations, and the logarithm of that partition function is the free energy. For a finite system, the free energy is a random quantity because the interactions are random. A useful question is therefore how far it can move from a deterministic high-temperature scale. Aizenman, Lebowitz and Ruelle (1987), and Comets and Neveu (1995) for Gaussian couplings, proved that for β<1\beta<1β<1 the variable log⁡ZN−β2N/4\log Z_N-\beta^2N/4logZN​−β2N/4 converges in law to a normal random variable ALR 1987; Talagrand asks instead for tail estimates valid for every NNN. Talagrand's Chapter 12 gives a finite-size tail bound and a bound on the expected free energy per site under explicit moment conditions on the interaction law Talagrand 1995.

The chapter belongs to a larger study of concentration inequalities on product spaces. Its relevance to the spin model is concrete: each pair interaction is an independent coordinate, while every spin configuration uses all those coordinates. The number of coordinates grows quadratically with the number of spins. A uniform estimate must respect both this growing dimension and the normalization in the energy Talagrand 1995, pp. 191–195.

Setting

Fix an integer N≥1N\ge1N≥1. A spin configuration is a vector ε=(εi)1≤i≤N\varepsilon=(\varepsilon_i)_{1\le i\le N}ε=(εi​)1≤i≤N​ with each εi∈{−1,1}\varepsilon_i\in\{-1,1\}εi​∈{−1,1}. Each unordered pair of sites i<ji<ji<j has a real coupling hijh_{ij}hij​. For an inverse temperature β>0\beta>0β>0, the normalized partition function is

ZN(h)=2−N∑ε∈{−1,1}Nexp⁡(βN∑1≤i<j≤Nhijεiεj).Z_N(h)=2^{-N}\sum_{\varepsilon\in\{-1,1\}^N} \exp\left(\frac{\beta}{\sqrt N}\sum_{1\le i<j\le N} h_{ij}\varepsilon_i\varepsilon_j\right).ZN​(h)=2−Nε∈{−1,1}N∑​exp​N​β​1≤i<j≤N∑​hij​εi​εj​​.

Write FN(h)=log⁡ZN(h)F_N(h)=\log Z_N(h)FN​(h)=logZN​(h). The factor 2−N2^{-N}2−N averages over configurations. Since every summand is positive, ZN(h)>0Z_N(h)>0ZN​(h)>0 for every array hhh, so this logarithm is defined without excluding any coupling array.

The couplings are independent with a common probability law ν\nuν on R\mathbb RR; their joint law is PN=ν⊗(N2)P_N=\nu^{\otimes\binom N2}PN​=ν⊗(2N​). Under ν\nuν, a single coupling HHH satisfies EH=EH3=0\mathbb EH=\mathbb EH^3=0EH=EH3=0 and EH2=1\mathbb EH^2=1EH2=1. The chapter also assumes Eeα∣H∣<∞\mathbb E e^{\alpha|H|}<\inftyEeα∣H∣<∞ for some α>0\alpha>0α>0. Its main theorem adds EeH<2\mathbb Ee^H<2EeH<2 and Ee−H<2\mathbb Ee^{-H}<2Ee−H<2. These inequalities describe a class of interaction laws rather than one chosen distribution. A median MNM_NMN​ of FNF_NFN​ means that both PN(FN≤MN)P_N(F_N\le M_N)PN​(FN​≤MN​) and PN(FN≥MN)P_N(F_N\ge M_N)PN​(FN​≥MN​) are at least 1/21/21/2 Talagrand 1995, pp. 191–193.

Formalization targets

The goal is Theorem 12.1. There is one absolute constant K>0K>0K>0 such that, for 0<β<10<\beta<10<β<1 and 0<t<N/K0<t<N/K0<t<N/K,

PN(∣FN−β2N4∣≥K(t+log⁡K1−β2)N)≤2e−t2,P_N\left(\left|F_N-\frac{\beta^2N}{4}\right|\ge K\left(t+\sqrt{\log\frac K{1-\beta^2}}\right)\sqrt N\right) \le 2e^{-t^2},PN​(​FN​−4β2N​​≥K(t+log1−β2K​​)N​)≤2e−t2,

and the same constant satisfies

−KNlog⁡21−β2≤1NEFN−β24≤KN.-\frac K{\sqrt N}\sqrt{\log\frac2{1-\beta^2}} \le \frac1N\mathbb EF_N-\frac{\beta^2}{4} \le \frac KN.−N​K​log1−β22​​≤N1​EFN​−4β2​≤NK​.

The first formula controls deviations at finite NNN; the second locates the expected free energy per site. The theorem leaves the absolute value of KKK unspecified, as the source does Talagrand 1995, Theorem 12.1.

Four numbered displays form the supporting targets. Equation (12.6) bounds the change in FNF_NFN​ when all couplings are changed. Equation (12.5) bounds deviations about any median. Equations (12.7) and (12.8) give first- and second-moment estimates for ZNZ_NZN​. Together these specify the deterministic regularity and probabilistic estimates used by the chapter Talagrand 1995, pp. 192–195.

Significance

The theorem gives a nonasymptotic probability estimate, valid for each finite size and each law meeting the stated conditions. It also bounds the difference between the mean free energy per site and β2/4\beta^2/4β2/4 as NNN grows, for fixed β<1\beta<1β<1. The moment estimates separately describe the scale of the partition function and limit its relative second moment. These conclusions keep the coupling law general within the stated moment class Talagrand 1995, Theorem 12.1 and Eqs. (12.7)–(12.8).

The result is proved in the cited paper; the open work here is its Lean formalization. A completed development would connect product-measure concentration, finite spin sums, exponential-moment bounds, and real-valued expectations in one reusable interface. The coupling product space and median conventions can also serve other finite random-interaction models. No machine-checked proof of this chapter's target is claimed by this proposal.

Difficulty

A direct bounded-differences estimate cannot be applied to this model as stated: the couplings are real and may be unbounded. An estimate that handles each coordinate must account for the law's exponential moments while still retaining the NNN and β\betaβ factors in the chapter's explicit bounds. The normalization by N\sqrt NN​ makes a single coupling's influence small, but there are (N2)\binom N2(2N​) couplings, so treating the total sensitivity as dimension-free would lose the scale of the theorem. The first moment alone also does not control the lower tail of ZNZ_NZN​; this is why the second-moment target is present Talagrand 1995, pp. 192–195.

Formalization scope

Lean indexes sites by Fin N and interactions by pairs with i<ji<ji<j. A spin is a Boolean choice interpreted as −1-1−1 or 111, and the configuration sum is normalized by 2N2^N2N. The coupling array is a function on the pair type, carrying the finite product measure of the common law ν\nuν. The theorem uses N≥1N\ge1N≥1, 0<β<10<\beta<10<β<1, and exactly the common-law moment assumptions above; the median deviation milestone uses N≥2N\ge2N≥2 because its denominator contains N−1N-1N−1. The main theorem places its single universal KKK before every size, temperature, law, and deviation level.

Expectations are Bochner integrals, so integrability is explicit in the law predicates or in each conclusion that needs it. Probability expressions are real values of measurable events under the product measure. This avoids relying on Lean's default value for a nonintegrable integral. The model retains the entire real coupling law and does not replace it with a finite alphabet or a Gaussian special case. The partition function is built from the couplings and spins, rather than supplied as an unconstrained variable.

The source's displayed (12.5) omits β\betaβ, whereas the derivation following (12.6) gives, for each tail separately, the range 0<t≤4βN(N−1)0<t\le4\beta\sqrt N(N-1)0<t≤4βN​(N−1) and the exponent −t2/(32β2(N−1))-t^2/(32\beta^2(N-1))−t2/(32β2(N−1)) with the factor 222. The formal milestone states exactly these two one-sided bounds, while its milestone text preserves the printed display verbatim. The first- and second-moment displays are kept with an absolute constant; the second-moment target uses the proof's N≥8N\ge8N≥8 range, since for smaller sizes the chapter's interaction-law assumptions do not ensure that ZN2Z_N^2ZN2​ is integrable. Integrability of FNF_NFN​ is a conclusion of the main theorem, never a hypothesis, and the median is quantified universally, so neither the expectation in (12.4) nor the deviation bound can hold by a default value of an undefined integral or by an unsatisfiable hypothesis; the Rademacher law ν=12(δ−1+δ1)\nu=\frac12(\delta_{-1}+\delta_1)ν=21​(δ−1​+δ1​) satisfies every assumption. Reusable contributions include integrability and measurability of ZNZ_NZN​ and FNF_NFN​, product-law estimates, and the source's numbered inequalities.

Selected references

  • Michel Talagrand, Concentration of measure and isoperimetric inequalities in product spaces, Publications Mathématiques de l'IHÉS 81 (1995), 73–205. DOI: 10.1007/BF02699376.
  • Michael Aizenman, Joel L. Lebowitz, David Ruelle, Some rigorous results on the Sherrington–Kirkpatrick spin glass model, Communications in Mathematical Physics 112 (1987), 3–20. DOI: 10.1007/BF01217677.
  • Francis Comets, Jacques Neveu, The Sherrington–Kirkpatrick model of spin glasses and stochastic calculus: the high temperature case, Communications in Mathematical Physics 166 (1995), 549–564. DOI: 10.1007/BF02099887.
6 thms2 active usersReviewed
CombinatoricsGraph Theory·Captain: mikedeng1

Concentration of Measure and Isoperimetric Inequalities in Product Spaces X: The Chromatic Number of Random Graphs — χ(G(n,p), m) Lies in an Interval of Length k with High ProbabilityTextbook

Motivation

The chromatic number of the random graph G(n,p)G(n,p)G(n,p) is one of the central random variables of probabilistic combinatorics. Its order of magnitude for constant ppp, χ(G(n,p))∼n/(2log⁡1/(1−p)n)\chi(G(n,p)) \sim n/(2\log_{1/(1-p)} n)χ(G(n,p))∼n/(2log1/(1−p)​n), was settled by Bollobás ([B], 1988); the question that remains is how much χ\chiχ fluctuates around its typical value. Shamir and Spencer ([S-S], 1987) used the edge- and vertex-exposure martingales to show that χ(G(n,p))\chi(G(n,p))χ(G(n,p)) lies, with high probability, in an interval of length about n\sqrt nn​, and for sparse graphs p=n−αp = n^{-\alpha}p=n−α in an interval of bounded length.

Chapter 9 of Talagrand's 1995 memoir revisits this question as an application of his convex-hull inequality (Theorem 4.1.1 of the paper, posed in a separate mission of this series). The author states the aim plainly: martingale methods require ingenuity on this problem, and the chapter shows that Theorem 4.1.1 gives somewhat better results "in a completely straightforward manner". The chapter also derives, from the same inequality, an upper bound on the probability that G(n,p)G(n,p)G(n,p) has no independent set of a given size — the quantity that drives the greedy colouring bound, previously obtained by Bollobás with martingales and by Janson's correlation inequality.

Timeline. 1987: Shamir–Spencer, concentration of χ(G(n,p))\chi(G(n,p))χ(G(n,p)) by martingales. 1988: Bollobás, the asymptotic value of χ(G(n,p))\chi(G(n,p))χ(G(n,p)) for constant ppp, via a martingale bound on independent sets. 1990: Janson's inequality gives a simpler route to the same independent-set bound. 1995: Talagrand, Theorem 9.1 and Proposition 9.2, both from the convex-hull inequality.

Setting

A graph GGG on the vertex set V={1,…,n}V = \{1,\dots,n\}V={1,…,n} is a subset of E0={(i,j); i<j}E_0 = \{(i,j);\ i<j\}E0​={(i,j); i<j}. A set I⊆VI \subseteq VI⊆V is independent if no two of its points are joined by an edge. For A⊆VA \subseteq VA⊆V, the chromatic number χ(G,A)\chi(G,A)χ(G,A) is the smallest number of independent sets that cover AAA, that is, the chromatic number of the subgraph induced on AAA; χ(G,∅)=0\chi(G,\emptyset) = 0χ(G,∅)=0. For an integer mmm,

χ(G,m)=inf⁡{χ(G,A); card⁡A=m}.\chi(G,m) = \inf\{\chi(G,A);\ \operatorname{card} A = m\}.χ(G,m)=inf{χ(G,A); cardA=m}.

Given 0<p<10<p<10<p<1, the random graph G(n,p)G(n,p)G(n,p) contains each possible edge (i,j)(i,j)(i,j) with probability ppp, independently. Concretely, x=(xe)e∈E0∈{0,1}E0x = (x_e)_{e \in E_0} \in \{0,1\}^{E_0}x=(xe​)e∈E0​​∈{0,1}E0​ carries the product of Bernoulli(p)(p)(p) laws and G(x)G(x)G(x) is the set of eee with xe=1x_e = 1xe​=1.

The vertex-exposure space is Ω′=∏jΩj\Omega' = \prod_{j} \Omega_jΩ′=∏j​Ωj​ with Ωj={0,1}j−1\Omega_j = \{0,1\}^{j-1}Ωj​={0,1}j−1: the coordinate ωj=(ωi,j)i<j\omega_j = (\omega_{i,j})_{i<j}ωj​=(ωi,j​)i<j​ lists the edges from jjj to earlier vertices, and G(ω)G(\omega)G(ω) contains (i,j)(i,j)(i,j) iff ωi,j=1\omega_{i,j}=1ωi,j​=1. Changing one coordinate of ω\omegaω changes only edges at one vertex.

For an integer rrr and e=(i,j)∈E0e = (i,j) \in E_0e=(i,j)∈E0​, N(G,e)N(G,e)N(G,e) denotes the number of independent sets of GGG of size rrr containing iii and jjj.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 9.1

For k∈Nk \in \mathbb Nk∈N, m≤nm \le nm≤n and t>0t>0t>0 there is an integer aaa such that

P(χ(G(n,p),m)∈[a−k,a]) ≥ 1−2e−t2/8−P(sup⁡{χ(G(n,p),F); F⊂V, card⁡F≤tm}>k).P\big(\chi(G(n,p),m) \in [a-k,a]\big) \ \ge\ 1 - 2e^{-t^2/8} - P\big(\sup\{\chi(G(n,p),F);\ F\subset V,\ \operatorname{card}F \le t\sqrt m\} > k\big).P(χ(G(n,p),m)∈[a−k,a]) ≥ 1−2e−t2/8−P(sup{χ(G(n,p),F); F⊂V, cardF≤tm​}>k).

The integer aaa depends on n,p,m,k,tn,p,m,k,tn,p,m,k,t. The last term is zero when k>tmk > t\sqrt mk>tm​, so for such kkk the chromatic number χ(G(n,p),m)\chi(G(n,p),m)χ(G(n,p),m) sits in a window of k+1k+1k+1 values except on an event of probability 2e−t2/82e^{-t^2/8}2e−t2/8.

The deterministic step of the proof, Eq. (9.3)

With A⊆Ω′A \subseteq \Omega'A⊆Ω′ the set of ω\omegaω with χ(G(ω),m)≥a\chi(G(\omega),m) \ge aχ(G(ω),m)≥a and sup⁡{χ(G(ω),F); card⁡F≤tm}≤k\sup\{\chi(G(\omega),F);\ \operatorname{card}F \le t\sqrt m\} \le ksup{χ(G(ω),F); cardF≤tm​}≤k, and

B={ω; ∀(αj)≥0, ∃ω′∈A; ∑jαj1{ωj≠ωj′}≤t∑jαj2},B = \Big\{\omega;\ \forall (\alpha_j) \ge 0,\ \exists \omega' \in A;\ \sum_j \alpha_j 1_{\{\omega_j \ne \omega'_j\}} \le t\sqrt{\textstyle\sum_j \alpha_j^2}\Big\},B={ω; ∀(αj​)≥0, ∃ω′∈A; j∑​αj​1{ωj​=ωj′​}​≤t∑j​αj2​​},

every ω∈B\omega \in Bω∈B satisfies χ(G(ω),m)≥a−k\chi(G(\omega),m) \ge a-kχ(G(ω),m)≥a−k.

Proposition 9.2 and Eq. (9.7)

The double count N=(r(r−1)/2)−1∑e∈E0N(G,e)N = \big(r(r-1)/2\big)^{-1}\sum_{e\in E_0} N(G,e)N=(r(r−1)/2)−1∑e∈E0​​N(G,e) of independent rrr-sets, and, for u≥0u \ge 0u≥0 and r≥2r \ge 2r≥2, if with probability greater than 1/21/21/2 the graph G(n,p)G(n,p)G(n,p) has an independent rrr-set and u∑eN(G(n,p),e)2≤∑eN(G(n,p),e)u\sqrt{\sum_e N(G(n,p),e)^2} \le \sum_e N(G(n,p),e)u∑e​N(G(n,p),e)2​≤∑e​N(G(n,p),e), then

P(G(n,p) contains no independent set of size r)≤2exp⁡(−u2r2(r−1)2).P\big(G(n,p)\ \text{contains no independent set of size } r\big) \le 2\exp\Big(-\frac{u^2}{r^2(r-1)^2}\Big).P(G(n,p) contains no independent set of size r)≤2exp(−r2(r−1)2u2​).

Significance

The results. Theorem 9.1 is a two-sided concentration statement for χ(G(n,p),m)\chi(G(n,p),m)χ(G(n,p),m) with an explicit Gaussian error 2e−t2/82e^{-t^2/8}2e−t2/8 and no loss in the exponent from a martingale difference bound; for sparse p=n−αp = n^{-\alpha}p=n−α, where small vertex sets are sparse enough to be coloured with few colours, it localises χ\chiχ to a bounded window. Proposition 9.2 is the independent-set estimate on which the greedy upper bound for χ(G(n,p))\chi(G(n,p))χ(G(n,p)) rests, obtained here with the same tool and constants 222 and r2(r−1)2r^2(r-1)^2r2(r−1)2 stated on the page.

Formalizing them. All results are proved on paper; none of them, nor any concentration statement for χ(G(n,p))\chi(G(n,p))χ(G(n,p)), is formalized in Lean or on the platform. A formal development gives a machine-checked model of G(n,p)G(n,p)G(n,p) both as an edge product and as a vertex-exposure product, a statement-level check of how the convex-hull inequality transfers to graph functionals, and a corrected form of Proposition 9.2 (see the scope section): the printed hypothesis (9.4) is satisfied vacuously by graphs without independent rrr-sets, and the formal statement records the hypothesis the proof uses.

Difficulty

The obvious encoding of G(n,p)G(n,p)G(n,p) is the edge product {0,1}E0\{0,1\}^{E_0}{0,1}E0​, and it is the wrong one for Theorem 9.1: changing the edges at one vertex changes up to n−1n-1n−1 coordinates, so a Hamming-type control of χ(G,m)\chi(G,m)χ(G,m) in the edge coordinates gives fluctuations of order n2\sqrt{n^2}n2​ instead of order m\sqrt mm​. The statement is therefore tied to the vertex-exposure product Ω′\Omega'Ω′, and transporting the law of G(n,p)G(n,p)G(n,p) to Ω′\Omega'Ω′ and handling the "largest integer aaa" with P(χ≥a)≥e−t2/8+bP(\chi \ge a) \ge e^{-t^2/8} + bP(χ≥a)≥e−t2/8+b are further steps a formal proof must carry out. For Proposition 9.2 a plain Hamming-distance bound in the edge coordinates gives the wrong dependence on the number of independent sets: a graph with many independent rrr-sets is turned into one with none by adding an edge inside each of them, and since these sets overlap heavily, the Hamming distance to the graphs without independent rrr-sets is not determined by their number.

Formalization scope

Vertices are Fin n (0-based). G(n,p)G(n,p)G(n,p) is graphOf x for x:E0→Boolx : E_0 \to \mathrm{Bool}x:E0​→Bool under gnp n p, the product (Measure.pi) of the law p δ1+(1−p) δ0p\,\delta_1 + (1-p)\,\delta_0pδ1​+(1−p)δ0​ on Bool, with E0E_0E0​ the subtype {(i,j):i<j}\{(i,j) : i<j\}{(i,j):i<j}; all sets of this finite space are measurable. Probabilities are Measure.real, so right-hand sides may be negative, as on the page. χ(G,A)\chi(G,A)χ(G,A) is Mathlib's chromaticNumber of the induced subgraph in ℕ∞; χ(G,m)\chi(G,m)χ(G,m) is an infimum in ℕ∞, equal to +∞+\infty+∞ when m>nm>nm>n, and Theorem 9.1 carries m≤nm \le nm≤n, implicit on the page, without which it fails. Comparisons with integers are made in WithTop ℤ. The supremum over small sets FFF is an ℕ∞ supremum over finsets with card⁡F≤tm\operatorname{card}F \le t\sqrt mcardF≤tm​. The vertex-exposure space has a coordinate {0,1}j\{0,1\}^j{0,1}j for every 0-based vertex jjj, the trivial one for j=0j=0j=0 included, as in the paper's ∏j≤nΩj\prod_{j\le n}\Omega_j∏j≤n​Ωj​; the weights in BBB are nonnegative, the setting of Lemma 4.1.2.

Proposition 9.2 is stated with three explicit additions: r≥2r \ge 2r≥2, u≥0u \ge 0u≥0, and the event of (9.4) intersected with "G(n,p)G(n,p)G(n,p) contains an independent set of size rrr". As printed, (9.4) holds for every uuu whenever G(n,p)G(n,p)G(n,p) almost surely has no independent rrr-set (both sums are zero), and the conclusion then fails; the proof selects a graph with N>0N>0N>0, which is exactly the added clause.

A formalization in which χ(G,m)\chi(G,m)χ(G,m) is a real infimum (junk value 000 on the empty family), in which the Bochner integral replaces probabilities, or in which the coloured set AAA ranges over all vertices instead of mmm-subsets would trivialise or change Theorem 9.1; these are ruled out by the definitions above.

Theorem 4.1.1 (the convex-hull inequality) and Lemma 4.1.2 are posed in their own mission and are not repeated here; a complete development needs them on the finite product Ω′\Omega'Ω′, the identity in law between the edge and vertex-exposure models, and monotonicity and subadditivity of chromatic numbers of induced subgraphs. The vertex-exposure model and the independent-set counts are reusable for other random-graph functionals. Proofs of any milestone, and of the law identity between the two models, are welcome.

Selected references

  • M. Talagrand, Concentration of measure and isoperimetric inequalities in product spaces, Publ. Math. IHÉS 81 (1995), 73–205. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02699376
  • E. Shamir, J. Spencer, Sharp concentration of the chromatic number on random graphs Gn,pG_{n,p}Gn,p​, Combinatorica 7 (1987), 121–129. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02579208
  • B. Bollobás, The chromatic number of random graphs, Combinatorica 8 (1988), 49–55. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02122551
  • S. Janson, Poisson approximation for large deviations, Random Structures & Algorithms 1 (1990), 221–229. https://doi.org/10.1002/rsa.3240010209
  • N. Alon, J. Spencer, The Probabilistic Method, Wiley, 1992 ([A-S] in the paper). https://doi.org/10.1002/0471722154
5 thms2 active usersReviewed
AnalysisCombinatorics·Captain: mikedeng1

Concentration of Measure and Isoperimetric Inequalities in Product Spaces V: The Convex Hull Distance — ∫ exp f_α(A,x) dP ≤ P(A)^{−α}Textbook

Motivation

A product probability space (ΩN,P)(\Omega^N, P)(ΩN,P), P=μ⊗NP=\mu^{\otimes N}P=μ⊗N, concentrates its mass: a set AAA of non-negligible measure is "close" to most points. How closeness is measured decides what the statement can be used for. The Hamming distance (Chapter 2 of the paper) counts coordinates in which a point differs from AAA; it gives Gaussian concentration, but only for functions that are Lipschitz for one fixed weighting of the coordinates. Chapter 4 of M. Talagrand, Concentration of measure and isoperimetric inequalities in product spaces (Publ. Math. IHÉS 81, 1995), introduces the convex hull distance, which controls every weighted Hamming distance at once with weights chosen after seeing the point. This one inequality is what the second half of the paper uses for the longest increasing subsequence, bin packing, suprema of linear forms, the chromatic number of random graphs, the random assignment problem and the travelling salesman problem, and it is the form in which "Talagrand's inequality" is usually quoted in probability and combinatorics.

History (paper, p. 125). The author first proved the deviation inequality of Theorem 13.2 of the paper for symmetric ±1\pm1±1 variables; W. B. Johnson and G. Schechtman extended it, and their one-dimensional lemma (Lemma 4.1.3 here) led to the abstract setting of Theorem 4.1.1. Section 4.2 sharpens the exponent 1/41/41/4 by replacing fc2/4f_c^2/4fc2​/4 with an exactly optimised penalty fαf_\alphafα​.

Setting

Let (Ω,μ)(\Omega,\mu)(Ω,μ) be a probability space, N≥0N\ge0N≥0 an integer and P=μ⊗NP=\mu^{\otimes N}P=μ⊗N on ΩN\Omega^NΩN. For A⊆ΩNA\subseteq\Omega^NA⊆ΩN and x∈ΩNx\in\Omega^Nx∈ΩN let

UA(x)={(si)i≤N∈{0,1}N; ∃y∈A, si=0⇒xi=yi},U_A(x)=\{(s_i)_{i\le N}\in\{0,1\}^N;\ \exists y\in A,\ s_i=0\Rightarrow x_i=y_i\},UA​(x)={(si​)i≤N​∈{0,1}N; ∃y∈A, si​=0⇒xi​=yi​},

the set of 000–111 vectors marking a superset of the coordinates in which xxx differs from some point of AAA. Let VA(x)V_A(x)VA​(x) be its convex hull in RN\mathbb R^NRN; it contains 000 exactly when x∈Ax\in Ax∈A. The convex hull distance fc(A,x)f_c(A,x)fc​(A,x) is the Euclidean distance from 000 to VA(x)V_A(x)VA​(x), and the enlargement of AAA is

Atc={x∈ΩN; fc(A,x)≤t}A_t^c=\{x\in\Omega^N;\ f_c(A,x)\le t\}Atc​={x∈ΩN; fc​(A,x)≤t}

(the superscript ccc stands for "convexity", not for a complement). For α≥0\alpha\ge0α≥0 and u∈[0,1]u\in[0,1]u∈[0,1] put

ξ(α,u)=α(1−u)log⁡(1−u)−(α+1−αu)log⁡(1+α−αu1+α),\xi(\alpha,u)=\alpha(1-u)\log(1-u)-(\alpha+1-\alpha u)\log\Big(\frac{1+\alpha-\alpha u}{1+\alpha}\Big),ξ(α,u)=α(1−u)log(1−u)−(α+1−αu)log(1+α1+α−αu​),

and let fα(A,x)=inf⁡{∑i≤Nξ(α,si); s∈VA(x)}f_\alpha(A,x)=\inf\{\sum_{i\le N}\xi(\alpha,s_i);\ s\in V_A(x)\}fα​(A,x)=inf{∑i≤N​ξ(α,si​); s∈VA​(x)}; it plays the role of fc2(A,x)f_c^2(A,x)fc2​(A,x).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.2.4

For α>0\alpha>0α>0 and every A⊆ΩNA\subseteq\Omega^NA⊆ΩN,

∫exp⁡fα(A,x) dP(x)≤1P(A)α.\int\exp f_\alpha(A,x)\,dP(x)\le\frac{1}{P(A)^{\alpha}}.∫expfα​(A,x)dP(x)≤P(A)α1​.

The constant is exact (no unspecified constants), and the statement holds for every probability space Ω\OmegaΩ and every NNN.

Milestones

  • Lemma 4.1.2: x∈Atcx\in A_t^cx∈Atc​ iff for every real (αi)(\alpha_i)(αi​) some y∈Ay\in Ay∈A has ∑{αi; xi≠yi}≤t(∑αi2)1/2\sum\{\alpha_i;\ x_i\ne y_i\}\le t(\sum\alpha_i^2)^{1/2}∑{αi​; xi​=yi​}≤t(∑αi2​)1/2.
  • Lemma 4.1.3: inf⁡0≤λ≤1r−λexp⁡(1−λ)24≤2−r\inf_{0\le\lambda\le1}r^{-\lambda}\exp\frac{(1-\lambda)^2}{4}\le2-rinf0≤λ≤1​r−λexp4(1−λ)2​≤2−r for 0≤r≤10\le r\le10≤r≤1.
  • Lemma 4.2.1: inf⁡0≤λ≤1r−λαexp⁡ξ(α,1−λ)=1+α−αr\inf_{0\le\lambda\le1}r^{-\lambda\alpha}\exp\xi(\alpha,1-\lambda)=1+\alpha-\alpha rinf0≤λ≤1​r−λαexpξ(α,1−λ)=1+α−αr for 0<r<10<r<10<r<1.
  • Lemma 4.2.2: ξ(α,⋅)\xi(\alpha,\cdot)ξ(α,⋅) is increasing and convex on [0,1][0,1][0,1] and ξ(α,u)≥α2(α+1)u2\xi(\alpha,u)\ge\frac{\alpha}{2(\alpha+1)}u^2ξ(α,u)≥2(α+1)α​u2.
  • Lemma 4.2.3: 1+α−αa≤a−α1+\alpha-\alpha a\le a^{-\alpha}1+α−αa≤a−α and a+(1−a)exp⁡ξ(α,1)≤a−αa+(1-a)\exp\xi(\alpha,1)\le a^{-\alpha}a+(1−a)expξ(α,1)≤a−α.
  • Eq. (4.2.6): P(Atc)≥1−P(A)−αexp⁡(−αt22(α+1))P(A_t^c)\ge1-P(A)^{-\alpha}\exp\big(-\frac{\alpha t^2}{2(\alpha+1)}\big)P(Atc​)≥1−P(A)−αexp(−2(α+1)αt2​).
  • Corollary 4.2.5: for t≥2log⁡(1/P(A))t\ge\sqrt{2\log(1/P(A))}t≥2log(1/P(A))​, P(Atc)≥1−exp⁡(−12(t−2log⁡(1/P(A)))2)P(A_t^c)\ge1-\exp\big(-\frac12(t-\sqrt{2\log(1/P(A))})^2\big)P(Atc​)≥1−exp(−21​(t−2log(1/P(A))​)2).
  • Theorem 4.3.1 (two-point space, uniform μ\muμ, α≥1\alpha\ge1α≥1): ∫exp⁡(αα+1fc2(A,x)) dP(x)≤P(A)−α\int\exp\big(\frac{\alpha}{\alpha+1}f_c^2(A,x)\big)\,dP(x)\le P(A)^{-\alpha}∫exp(α+1α​fc2​(A,x))dP(x)≤P(A)−α.

Significance

The result. At α=1\alpha=1α=1, Lemma 4.2.2 gives ξ(1,u)≥u2/4\xi(1,u)\ge u^2/4ξ(1,u)≥u2/4, so the goal contains Theorem 4.1.1,

∫exp⁡14fc2(A,x) dP(x)≤1P(A),P(Atc)≥1−1P(A)e−t2/4,\int\exp\tfrac14f_c^2(A,x)\,dP(x)\le\frac1{P(A)},\qquad P(A_t^c)\ge1-\frac1{P(A)}e^{-t^2/4},∫exp41​fc2​(A,x)dP(x)≤P(A)1​,P(Atc​)≥1−P(A)1​e−t2/4,

the convex distance inequality itself. For general α\alphaα it improves the coefficient of t2t^2t2 from 1/41/41/4 to the optimal 1/21/21/2 (Corollary 4.2.5), and since ξ(α,1)=log⁡(1+α)\xi(\alpha,1)=\log(1+\alpha)ξ(α,1)=log(1+α) grows with α\alphaα, it simultaneously controls the number of coordinates in which xxx must be changed to reach AAA, recovering features of the qqq-point inequalities of Chapter 3. Every Part II application of the paper rests on Theorem 4.1.1 or on this sharpening.

Formalizing it. All results here are proved in the paper (the goal's proof is "an obvious adaptation" of that of Theorem 4.1.1, by induction on NNN). None of them has a machine-checked proof for a general probability space. Theorem 4.1.1 itself is posed on the platform, still open, for finite alphabets and finite sets (Talagrand.Eexp_mul_mass_le_one, Talagrand.mass_mul_mass_le_exp); it is not posed again here. A proof of the goal settles it for arbitrary Ω\OmegaΩ and arbitrary measurable AAA.

Difficulty

The function x↦fα(A,x)x\mapsto f_\alpha(A,x)x↦fα​(A,x) is not a sum of one-coordinate terms, so no tensorization of a one-dimensional inequality applies directly. Bounding fα(A,x)f_\alpha(A,x)fα​(A,x) pointwise by the distance to a single nearby point of AAA gives only Hamming-type bounds with a fixed weighting, which is exactly what the convex hull distance is designed to beat; the inequality has to hold for the infimum over the whole hull. The one-coordinate estimate the paper uses is the exact identity of Lemma 4.2.1, which leaves no slack. A further obstacle is analytic: VA(x)V_A(x)VA​(x) is a convex hull in RN\mathbb R^NRN of a set indexed by the possibly uncountable set AAA, and its infima must be compared across dimensions NNN and N+1N+1N+1.

Formalization scope

  • ΩN\Omega^NΩN is Fin N → Ω; PPP is Measure.pi (fun _ : Fin N => μ) with IsProbabilityMeasure μ.
  • UA(x)U_A(x)UA​(x) is a set of Fin N → ℝ with values in {0,1}\{0,1\}{0,1}; VA(x)V_A(x)VA​(x) is convexHull ℝ (U A x). The ℓ2\ell^2ℓ2 norm is written out as ∑isi2\sqrt{\sum_i s_i^2}∑i​si2​​: Mathlib's norm on Fin N → ℝ is the sup norm.
  • fcf_cfc​ and fαf_\alphafα​ take values in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞] (ℝ≥0∞); both are +∞+\infty+∞ when A=∅A=\varnothingA=∅. exp⁡(+∞)=+∞\exp(+\infty)=+\inftyexp(+∞)=+∞ (EReal.exp), P(A)−α=+∞P(A)^{-\alpha}=+\inftyP(A)−α=+∞ when P(A)=0P(A)=0P(A)=0. No real-valued infimum or Bochner integral is used, so no junk value can make a bound hold for free.
  • ξ(α,1)=log⁡(1+α)\xi(\alpha,1)=\log(1+\alpha)ξ(α,1)=log(1+α) relies on 0⋅log⁡0=00\cdot\log0=00⋅log0=0, which Mathlib's Real.log 0 = 0 provides.
  • Measurability. The paper ignores measurability (pp. 81–82). Here AAA and x↦fα(A,x)x\mapsto f_\alpha(A,x)x↦fα​(A,x) are assumed measurable (explicit hypotheses), integrals are ∫⁻, and P(Atc)P(A_t^c)P(Atc​) is the measure of an arbitrary set, i.e. its outer probability, as the paper prescribes.
  • α>0\alpha>0α>0 in the goal; t≥0t\ge0t≥0 for the enlargement; P(A)>0P(A)>0P(A)>0 in Corollary 4.2.5, where the paper's hypothesis on ttt is otherwise unsatisfiable. In §4.3, Ω={0,1}\Omega=\{0,1\}Ω={0,1} is Bool with PMF.uniformOfFintype.
  • A trivializing formalization is ruled out: restricting Ω\OmegaΩ to a finite type or AAA to a finite set would give a strictly weaker statement (and the finite case of Theorem 4.1.1 is already posed elsewhere).
  • Needed infrastructure: convex hulls of 000–111 vectors and their behaviour under adding a coordinate, Hölder's inequality for ∫⁻, Fubini for Measure.pi on Fin (N+1), and the one-variable calculus of ξ\xiξ. The definitions module is the substrate the Part II chapters of the paper use; proofs of the one-variable lemmas and of the induction step are welcome independently.
  • Corollary 4.3.2 is not included: the paper derives it from Theorem 4.3.1 by optimising over α≥1\alpha\ge1α≥1, which only covers t≥2log⁡(1/P(A))t\ge2\sqrt{\log(1/P(A))}t≥2log(1/P(A))​, and the printed range t≥log⁡(1/P(A))t\ge\sqrt{\log(1/P(A))}t≥log(1/P(A))​ is not established on the page.

Selected references

  • M. Talagrand, Concentration of measure and isoperimetric inequalities in product spaces, Publ. Math. IHÉS 81 (1995), 73–205. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02699376
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
Bandit AlgorithmsOperations ResearchStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Some Aspects of the Sequential Design of Experiments I: Greedy Sampling with Density-Zero Forced Draws Earns max(α, β) per Draw from Any Two Populations with Finite MeansResearch Paper

Motivation

An experimenter can draw observations from two populations AAA and BBB, one at a time, and wants the sum of the observations to be as large as possible. The populations might be two treatments, two seed varieties or two manufacturing processes; their means are unknown. Each draw both earns a reward and tells the experimenter something about the population it came from. This is the two-armed bandit problem. Herbert Robbins posed it in its modern form in his 1952 address to the American Mathematical Society, Some aspects of the sequential design of experiments, the paper usually credited with founding the field.

Section 2 of that paper asks a basic question (display (12), p. 532): is there any sampling rule whose average reward per draw approaches the larger of the two means, whatever the populations are? Robbins answers yes, for any two populations with finite means, using one explicit rule: forced sampling along a sparse schedule, greedy choice otherwise. This mission formalizes that answer.

Timeline:

  • 1933. Thompson proposes a randomized rule for choosing between two treatments (Biometrika 25).
  • 1952. Robbins states the problem for general populations and gives the rule Rˉ\bar RRˉ with lim⁡nLn(A,B,Rˉ)=0\lim_n L_n(A,B,\bar R) = 0limn​Ln​(A,B,Rˉ)=0 for any two populations with finite means. The argument is only indicated ("it can be shown").
  • 1985. Lai and Robbins replace o(n)o(n)o(n) loss by the optimal logarithmic regret for parametric families (Adv. Appl. Math. 6).
  • 2020. Lattimore and Szepesvári give the textbook account of explore-then-commit and ε\varepsilonε-greedy rules, which descend from forced sampling (Bandit Algorithms).

Setting

Population AAA has distribution function FFF and population BBB has GGG, with expectations

α=∫−∞∞x dF(x),β=∫−∞∞x dG(x),\alpha = \int_{-\infty}^{\infty} x\,dF(x), \qquad \beta = \int_{-\infty}^{\infty} x\,dG(x),α=∫−∞∞​xdF(x),β=∫−∞∞​xdG(x),

assumed to exist, i.e. to be finite (display (1), p. 529). Nothing else is assumed about FFF and GGG.

A sampling rule RRR draws x1,x2,…x_1, x_2, \dotsx1​,x2​,… one at a time; the population of the iii-th draw may depend on x1,…,xi−1x_1, \dots, x_{i-1}x1​,…,xi−1​, and given that choice xix_ixi​ is a fresh draw from the chosen population. Write Sn=x1+⋯+xnS_n = x_1 + \cdots + x_nSn​=x1​+⋯+xn​. The loss of RRR after nnn draws (display (9), p. 531) is

Ln(A,B,R)=max⁡(α,β)−E ⁣(Snn),L_n(A, B, R) = \max(\alpha, \beta) - E\!\left(\frac{S_n}{n}\right),Ln​(A,B,R)=max(α,β)−E(nSn​​),

the average shortfall per draw compared with someone who knows the better population and samples only from it.

The forcing schedule (display (13), p. 532) is a pair of disjoint, strictly increasing sequences of positive integers

1=a1<a2<⋯ ,2=b1<b2<⋯1 = a_1 < a_2 < \cdots, \qquad 2 = b_1 < b_2 < \cdots1=a1​<a2​<⋯,2=b1​<b2​<⋯

of density zero: the fraction of the integers 1,…,n1, \dots, n1,…,n that are an aaa or a bbb tends to 000.

The rule Rˉ\bar RRˉ: at draw iii, sample AAA if iii is an aaa, sample BBB if iii is a bbb, and otherwise sample AAA if the mean of the previous observations from AAA is strictly larger than the mean of the previous observations from BBB, and BBB if it is not (a tie goes to BBB).

Formalization targets

Goal: Section 2, Eq. (16)

For every pair of populations with finite means and every forcing schedule,

lim⁡n→∞Ln(A,B,Rˉ)=0.\lim_{n\to\infty} L_n(A, B, \bar R) = 0.n→∞lim​Ln​(A,B,Rˉ)=0.

The goal is about the specific rule Rˉ\bar RRˉ and every schedule, not about the mere existence of a rule. It contains no rate and no constant, so it stays valid when the rule is analysed more finely.

Milestone: Eq. (14), almost-sure average

lim⁡n→∞Snn=max⁡(α,β)with probability 1.\lim_{n\to\infty} \frac{S_n}{n} = \max(\alpha, \beta) \quad\text{with probability } 1.n→∞lim​nSn​​=max(α,β)with probability 1.

Milestone: Eq. (15), expected average

lim⁡n→∞E ⁣(Snn)=max⁡(α,β).\lim_{n\to\infty} E\!\left(\frac{S_n}{n}\right) = \max(\alpha, \beta).n→∞lim​E(nSn​​)=max(α,β).

The goal follows from (15) by the definition (9); the paper's chain is (14) ⇒ (15) ⇒ (16).

Significance

The result. The theorem answers question (12) and shows that "learning while earning" costs nothing in the long run, per draw, under no assumption beyond finite means: no bounded support, no variance, no parametric family. It is the first consistency result for an adaptive allocation rule, and it fixes the benchmark later refined by logarithmic-regret theory. In modern terms, a forced-exploration greedy policy has regret o(n)o(n)o(n) on every two-armed bandit with integrable rewards.

Formalizing it. The paper gives no proof; it says the results "can be shown". A machine-checked proof records the argument in full. The platform already has finite-horizon regret bounds for ε\varepsilonε-greedy with bounded rewards (FoundationsRL.Bandits.epsilon_greedy_regret_bound), consistency in the stronger Lai–Robbins sense as a definition (ConsistentBanditPolicy), and a forced-sample tail bound for the Lasso bandit (BastaniBayati.LassoBandit.forced_sample_estimator_tail). None of these covers a deterministic greedy rule, almost-sure convergence, or unbounded rewards with only a first moment, and none of them proves (14)–(16).

Difficulty

The obvious argument is: each population is sampled infinitely often because of the forced draws, so each running mean converges by the strong law, so greedy eventually picks the better population, and the forced draws are negligible. Two steps are not routine.

First, the strong law applies to i.i.d. sequences, while the observations from AAA arrive at random, history-dependent times. The values seen from AAA have to be identified, in law, with an i.i.d. sequence that is independent of the times at which they are used.

Second, passing from (14) to (15) needs uniform integrability of Sn/nS_n/nSn​/n, and only first moments are available. No second moment is assumed, so variance bounds are not available.

When α=β\alpha = \betaα=β greedy need not settle on either population; the statement must hold anyway, and an argument that waits for greedy to "lock in" does not cover this case.

Formalization scope

The populations are a published two-armed BanditAlgorithm.StochasticBandit 2. AAA is arm 0 and BBB is arm 1; α\alphaα and β\betaβ are banditArmMean. A rule is a published BanditPolicy 2, and EEE is the integral against the published infinite-horizon law banditTrajMeasure, whose coordinate ttt is the paper's draw t+1t+1t+1. Explicit readings of the paper's phrases:

  • "the expectations exist" means both reward laws are Integrable. This is the only assumption on the populations: the class DDD of the paper is left arbitrary, and α=β\alpha = \betaα=β is allowed.
  • "density 0" means #({1,…,n} ∩ (range a ∪ range b)) / n → 0 in R\mathbb RR. The sequences are infinite and 0-indexed (a 0 = 1, b 0 = 2).
  • "according as … exceeds or does not exceed": AAA exactly when meanA_AA​ > meanB_BB​, so ties go to BBB.
  • "with probability 1" is ∀ᵐ under the trajectory law, and "lim" is Tendsto … atTop along n∈Nn \in \mathbb Nn∈N.
  • Sn/nS_n/nSn​/n uses real division; its value at n=0n = 0n=0 plays no role.

Trivializing formalizations are excluded. Without integrability the means and expectations are junk zeros; this is ruled out by the integrability hypothesis. Replacing Rˉ\bar RRˉ by "there exists a rule" would weaken the goal to (12). Finite forcing sets would make the statement false.

The needed infrastructure is a representation of the adaptive sampling process by per-population i.i.d. reward sequences, the strong law along random subsequences, and a uniform-integrability argument for averages under only a first moment. All three are reusable for other forced-exploration and greedy policies. Contributions of these general lemmas as separate theorems are welcome.

Selected references

  • H. Robbins, Some aspects of the sequential design of experiments, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 58(5) (1952), 527–535. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9904-1952-09620-8
  • W. R. Thompson, On the likelihood that one unknown probability exceeds another in view of the evidence of two samples, Biometrika 25 (1933), 285–294. https://doi.org/10.2307/2332286
  • T. L. Lai and H. Robbins, Asymptotically efficient adaptive allocation rules, Adv. Appl. Math. 6 (1985), 4–22. https://doi.org/10.1016/0196-8858(85)90002-8
  • T. Lattimore and Cs. Szepesvári, Bandit Algorithms, Cambridge University Press, 2020. https://doi.org/10.1017/9781108571401
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
Operations ResearchStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Regenerative Stochastic Processes 1: The State Probabilities of an Aperiodic Equilibrium Process Converge to (1/μ₁)∫φ_A(v){1 − F(v)}dvResearch Paper

Motivation

Many stochastic systems studied in operations research "start afresh" at certain random instants: a single-server queue each time a customer arrives to find the server idle, an inventory system each time stock is replenished to its order level, a reliability system each time a failed unit is replaced. Between such instants the system may evolve in a complicated way, but its future after one of them does not depend on its past. W. L. Smith's 1955 paper Regenerative stochastic processes made this idea into a general theory. Its first main result, Theorem 2, says that the state probabilities of such a process converge as time grows, and gives the limit explicitly in terms of the behaviour of the process within one cycle and the law of the cycle length.

This limit theorem is the standard way of proving that a queue, an inventory or a reliability model has a limiting distribution and of computing it: one exhibits regeneration points and evaluates one cycle.

Timeline.

  • 1948: Blackwell proves that the renewal function of a non-lattice renewal process has increments H(t+h)−H(t)→h/μ1H(t+h) - H(t) \to h/\mu_1H(t+h)−H(t)→h/μ1​ (Duke Math. J. 15).
  • 1949: Erdős, Feller and Pollard prove the discrete (lattice) renewal theorem.
  • 1954: Smith proves the key renewal theorem for bounded, non-increasing, integrable kernels, and a version for kernels tending to zero when some convolution power of the cycle law has an absolutely continuous part (Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh A 64).
  • 1955: Smith introduces regenerative and equilibrium processes and proves Theorem 2 (this paper).

Setting

A general renewal process is a sequence t0,t1,t2,…t_0, t_1, t_2, \dotst0​,t1​,t2​,… of independent non-negative random variables in which t1,t2,…t_1, t_2, \dotst1​,t2​,… have a common law FFF, not concentrated at 000, with mean μ1=∫x dF(x)∈(0,∞]\mu_1 = \int x\,dF(x) \in (0,\infty]μ1​=∫xdF(x)∈(0,∞], and the delay t0t_0t0​ has a law KKK. The regeneration epochs are Tk=t0+⋯+tkT_k = t_0 + \dots + t_kTk​=t0​+⋯+tk​, and ntn_tnt​ is the number of epochs in [0,t][0,t][0,t]. The renewal measure is

HK=∑n≥0K∗F∗n,H_K = \sum_{n \ge 0} K * F^{*n},HK​=n≥0∑​K∗F∗n,

so that HK([0,t])=E ntH_K([0,t]) = \mathbb E\, n_tHK​([0,t])=Ent​. The law FFF is periodic with period ϖ>0\varpi > 0ϖ>0 if all its mass sits on {0,ϖ,2ϖ,… }\{0, \varpi, 2\varpi, \dots\}{0,ϖ,2ϖ,…}; otherwise ϖ=0\varpi = 0ϖ=0 and FFF is aperiodic. FFF belongs to the class S\mathfrak SS if some convolution power F∗kF^{*k}F∗k, k≥1k \ge 1k≥1, has a non-zero absolutely continuous component.

An equilibrium process E(z,A,{ti})\mathcal E(\mathfrak z, \mathcal A, \{t_i\})E(z,A,{ti​}) consists of a process xtx_txt​ on a measurable state space X\mathfrak XX, a class A\mathcal AA of measurable sets of states, a family of probability measures P{⋅∣z}P\{\cdot \mid z\}P{⋅∣z} indexed by boundary conditions z∈zz \in \mathfrak zz∈z, and under each of them a general renewal process whose cycle law FFF does not depend on zzz and whose delay has law KzK_zKz​. For each A∈AA \in \mathcal AA∈A there is a measurable function φA\varphi_AφA​, depending on AAA only, such that

P{xt∈A∣z; nt>0; Lt}=φA(t−Lt),P\{x_t \in A \mid z;\ n_t > 0;\ L_t\} = \varphi_A(t - L_t),P{xt​∈A∣z; nt​>0; Lt​}=φA​(t−Lt​),

where LtL_tLt​ is the epoch of the last regeneration at or before ttt. In words: once a regeneration has occurred, the chance of being in AAA at time ttt depends only on the time elapsed since the last one.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2

If the process is aperiodic (ϖ=0\varpi = 0ϖ=0) and the regeneration event is certain (Kz(+∞)=1K_z(+\infty) = 1Kz​(+∞)=1), then for every zzz and every A∈AA \in \mathcal AA∈A satisfying one of the regularity conditions (iv)′'′ (φA{1−F}\varphi_A\{1-F\}φA​{1−F} integrable and monotonic), (iv)a′′''_aa′′​ (μ1<∞\mu_1 < \inftyμ1​<∞ and φA{1−F}\varphi_A\{1-F\}φA​{1−F} of locally bounded variation) or (iv)b′′''_bb′′​ (μ1<∞\mu_1 < \inftyμ1​<∞ and F∈SF \in \mathfrak SF∈S),

lim⁡t→∞P{xt∈A∣z}=1μ1∫0∞φA(v){1−F(v)} dv,\lim_{t\to\infty} P\{x_t \in A \mid z\} = \frac{1}{\mu_1} \int_0^\infty \varphi_A(v)\{1 - F(v)\}\,dv,t→∞lim​P{xt​∈A∣z}=μ1​1​∫0∞​φA​(v){1−F(v)}dv,

the limit being 000 when μ1=∞\mu_1 = \inftyμ1​=∞.

Milestones

  1. Theorem A(a), the key renewal theorem: for bounded, non-increasing, integrable Ψ\PsiΨ and aperiodic FFF, ∫0tΨ(t−t′) dHK(t′)→(K(+∞)/μ1)∫0∞Ψ\int_0^t \Psi(t-t')\,dH_K(t') \to (K(+\infty)/\mu_1)\int_0^\infty \Psi∫0t​Ψ(t−t′)dHK​(t′)→(K(+∞)/μ1​)∫0∞​Ψ.
  2. Lemma A: for F∈SF \in \mathfrak SF∈S, (1−G∗(s))/(1−F∗(s))(1 - G^*(s))/(1 - F^*(s))(1−G∗(s))/(1−F∗(s)) is the Laplace–Stieltjes transform of a function of bounded variation with net variation λ1/μ1\lambda_1/\mu_1λ1​/μ1​.
  3. Theorem 1: the same limit for bounded integrable Ψ→0\Psi \to 0Ψ→0 when F∈SF \in \mathfrak SF∈S and μ1<∞\mu_1 < \inftyμ1​<∞.
  4. (3·4·3): P{xt∈A∣z}=P{xt∈A,t0>t∣z}+∫0tφA(t−τ){1−F(t−τ)} dHKz(τ)P\{x_t \in A \mid z\} = P\{x_t \in A, t_0 > t \mid z\} + \int_0^t \varphi_A(t-\tau)\{1-F(t-\tau)\}\,dH_{K_z}(\tau)P{xt​∈A∣z}=P{xt​∈A,t0​>t∣z}+∫0t​φA​(t−τ){1−F(t−τ)}dHKz​​(τ).
  5. (3·4·5): ∫t−Δtg(t−v) dHK(v)→μ1−1∫0Δg\int_{t-\Delta}^t g(t-v)\,dH_K(v) \to \mu_1^{-1}\int_0^\Delta g∫t−Δt​g(t−v)dHK​(v)→μ1−1​∫0Δ​g for the page's kernel g=φA(1−F)g=\varphi_A(1-F)g=φA​(1−F) of locally bounded variation.
  6. (3·4·7): ∫0t−Δ{1−F(t−v)} dH(v)→μ1−1∫Δ∞{1−F}\int_0^{t-\Delta}\{1-F(t-v)\}\,dH(v) \to \mu_1^{-1}\int_\Delta^\infty\{1-F\}∫0t−Δ​{1−F(t−v)}dH(v)→μ1−1​∫Δ∞​{1−F}; the limit is at most ε\varepsilonε for large enough Δ\DeltaΔ.

Significance

The result. Theorem 2 reduces the long-run behaviour of a regenerative system to a one-cycle computation: the limiting probability of AAA is the expected time spent in AAA during a cycle divided by the expected cycle length. It underlies the existence of limiting distributions for the waiting time in the GI/G/1 queue, the number in system in many queueing networks, inventory levels under (s,S)(s,S)(s,S) policies and the availability of repairable systems, and it is the continuous-time counterpart of the ergodic theorem for positive recurrent Markov chains. The paper's later sections apply it to semi-Markov processes.

Formalizing it. The results here are classical and proved; none is machine-checked. Mathlib has measure convolution and the strong law of large numbers but no renewal measure, no Blackwell or key renewal theorem, and no regenerative process. On Prove2Me only the discrete Erdős–Feller–Pollard renewal theorem for renewal sequences is proved. A completed mission supplies the continuous-time key renewal theorem in two forms, a reusable renewal-measure interface, and a general limit theorem for regenerative processes on which queueing and inventory results can be built.

Difficulty

The decomposition (3·4·3) is a direct consequence of independence and the renewal structure. The difficulty is the key renewal theorem. Blackwell's theorem controls HKH_KHK​ on intervals of fixed length; passing from intervals to a general kernel requires the kernel to be directly Riemann integrable, which is why Theorem A asks for monotonicity and Theorem 2 lists three alternative regularity conditions. A merely integrable kernel tending to zero is not enough for a general aperiodic FFF: HKH_KHK​ may concentrate on a set where the kernel has tall narrow spikes. Theorem 1 removes monotonicity only for F∈SF \in \mathfrak SF∈S, through a Laplace-transform argument that needs Lemma A, the uniqueness theorem for Laplace transforms and the fact that the singular part of HKH_KHK​ contributes nothing in the limit. Blackwell's theorem itself, for a non-lattice law with possibly infinite mean, is not in any library and is a substantial development of its own.

Formalization scope

Laws are measures on R\mathbb RR carried by [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞); the distribution function is F(t)=F((−∞,t])F(t) = F((-\infty,t])F(t)=F((−∞,t]) and 1−F(v)=F((v,∞))1 - F(v) = F((v,\infty))1−F(v)=F((v,∞)). The mean μ1\mu_1μ1​ is an extended non-negative real, so μ1=∞\mu_1 = \inftyμ1​=∞ is a value; every statement with a 1/μ11/\mu_11/μ1​ treats μ1=∞\mu_1 = \inftyμ1​=∞ and μ1<∞\mu_1 < \inftyμ1​<∞ as separate cases rather than relying on a default value of division. Stieltjes integrals ∫0t⋯dHK\int_0^t \cdots dH_K∫0t​⋯dHK​ are integrals against the renewal measure over the closed interval [0,t][0,t][0,t]. Aperiodicity is the lattice condition on FFF, not a density condition. The delay law KKK in Theorem A and Theorem 1 may have mass below one.

In the equilibrium process the conditional-probability representation is stated as the defining identity of conditional probability for every Borel set of last-regeneration epochs, every t≥0t \ge 0t≥0, every zzz and every A∈AA \in \mathcal AA∈A. The paper writes TntT_{n_t}Tnt​​ for the last regeneration epoch, although under its own indexing that symbol is the first epoch after ttt; the formalization uses the last epoch at or before ttt. The delay t0t_0t0​ is real-valued, so the regeneration event is certain (hypothesis (iii)); improper delays and cycles, which §3 of the paper also allows, are outside this mission.

A trivializing formalization would condition only on {nt>0}\{n_t > 0\}{nt​>0} rather than on the epoch of the last regeneration, or fix μ1<∞\mu_1 < \inftyμ1​<∞ globally; both are ruled out, and hypothesis (iv) is imposed separately for the one set AAA of the conclusion.

Infrastructure needed: Blackwell's renewal theorem (non-lattice, finite or infinite mean), direct Riemann integrability, Laplace–Stieltjes transforms of functions of bounded variation and their uniqueness. All of these are reusable well beyond this paper; contributions of any of them are welcome. The convolution power and the Laplace–Stieltjes transform are taken from the published definition QueueingFundamentals.MG1.transforms.

Selected references

  • W. L. Smith, Regenerative stochastic processes, Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A 232 (1955), 6–31. https://doi.org/10.1098/rspa.1955.0198
  • W. L. Smith, Asymptotic renewal theorems, Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh A 64 (1954), 9–48. https://doi.org/10.1017/S0080454100007482
  • D. Blackwell, A renewal theorem, Duke Math. J. 15 (1948), 145–150. https://doi.org/10.1215/S0012-7094-48-01568-3
  • P. Erdős, W. Feller, H. Pollard, A property of power series with positive coefficients, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 55 (1949), 201–204. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9904-1949-09203-0
  • S. Asmussen, Applied Probability and Queues, 2nd ed., Springer, 2003, Ch. V–VI. https://doi.org/10.1007/b97236
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
PreviousPage 8 of 38Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me